gdb: add target_ops::supports_displaced_step
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set PDP11
35 @set POWERPC
36 @set POWERPC64
37 @set Renesas
38 @set S/390
39 @set SPU
40 @set TICOFF
41 @set WIN32
42 @set XTENSA
43 @end ifset
44 @c man end
45
46 @ifnottex
47 @dircategory Software development
48 @direntry
49 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
50 @end direntry
51 @end ifnottex
52
53 @copying
54 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57 @end ifset
58 version @value{VERSION}.
59
60 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61
62 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
63 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
64 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
67 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
68 @end copying
69 @iftex
70 @finalout
71 @setchapternewpage odd
72 @settitle The GNU linker
73 @titlepage
74 @title The GNU linker
75 @sp 1
76 @subtitle @code{ld}
77 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79 @end ifset
80 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81 @author Steve Chamberlain
82 @author Ian Lance Taylor
83 @page
84
85 @tex
86 {\parskip=0pt
87 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
89 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
90 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91 }
92 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93 @end tex
94
95 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
96 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
97 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105 @c man end
106
107 @end titlepage
108 @end iftex
109 @contents
110 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112 @ifnottex
113 @node Top
114 @top LD
115 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118 @end ifset
119 version @value{VERSION}.
120
121 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125 @menu
126 * Overview:: Overview
127 * Invocation:: Invocation
128 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129 @ifset GENERIC
130 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131 @end ifset
132 @ifclear GENERIC
133 @ifset H8300
134 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset Renesas
137 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset ARM
140 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset M68HC11
143 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68K
149 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset MIPS
152 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset S/390
161 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset SPU
164 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset TICOFF
167 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset WIN32
170 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171 @end ifset
172 @ifset XTENSA
173 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174 @end ifset
175 @end ifclear
176 @ifclear SingleFormat
177 * BFD:: BFD
178 @end ifclear
179 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
183 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
184 * LD Index:: LD Index
185 @end menu
186 @end ifnottex
187
188 @node Overview
189 @chapter Overview
190
191 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192 @cindex what is this?
193
194 @ifset man
195 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
196 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
197 @c man end
198
199 @c man begin SEEALSO
200 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202 @file{ld}.
203 @c man end
204 @end ifset
205
206 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
208 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
209 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
210 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
211
212 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
213 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
216 @ifset man
217 @c For the man only
218 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
219 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
221 @end ifset
222
223 @ifclear SingleFormat
224 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
226 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229 @end ifclear
230
231 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
234 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
235 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
237 @c man end
238
239 @node Invocation
240 @chapter Invocation
241
242 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
244 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
245 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246 you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
248 @c man end
249
250 @ifset UsesEnvVars
251 @menu
252 * Options:: Command-line Options
253 * Environment:: Environment Variables
254 @end menu
255
256 @node Options
257 @section Command-line Options
258 @end ifset
259
260 @cindex command line
261 @cindex options
262
263 @c man begin OPTIONS
264
265 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267 @cindex standard Unix system
268 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
269 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270 link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272 @smallexample
273 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274 @end smallexample
275
276 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
277 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
281 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
282 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
287 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289 noted in the descriptions below.
290
291 @cindex object files
292 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295 an option and its argument.
296
297 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301 message @samp{No input files}.
302
303 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
304 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
309 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
314
315 For options whose names are a single letter,
316 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318 option that requires them.
319
320 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
321 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
322 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
323 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
324 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
325 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327 output.
328
329 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334 accepted.
335
336 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
337 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
338 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339 compiler driver) like this:
340
341 @smallexample
342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
343 @end smallexample
344
345 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
346 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353 @smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355 @end smallexample
356
357 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
358 linker:
359
360 @table @gcctabopt
361 @include at-file.texi
362
363 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
364 @item -a @var{keyword}
365 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
371 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
378 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
379 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
380 interface.
381
382 @ifclear SingleFormat
383 @cindex binary input format
384 @kindex -b @var{format}
385 @kindex --format=@var{format}
386 @cindex input format
387 @cindex input format
388 @item -b @var{input-format}
389 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
390 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
392 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
393 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
394 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
395 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
396 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400 @xref{BFD}.
401
402 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404 linking object files of different formats), by including
405 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
406 particular format.
407
408 The default format is taken from the environment variable
409 @code{GNUTARGET}.
410 @ifset UsesEnvVars
411 @xref{Environment}.
412 @end ifset
413 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
414 @code{TARGET};
415 @ifclear man
416 see @ref{Format Commands}.
417 @end ifclear
418 @end ifclear
419
420 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422 @cindex compatibility, MRI
423 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
425 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
426 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
427 @ifclear man
428 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429 @end ifclear
430 @ifset man
431 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432 @end ifset
433 Introduce MRI script files with
434 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
435 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
437 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439 @cindex common allocation
440 @kindex -d
441 @kindex -dc
442 @kindex -dp
443 @item -d
444 @itemx -dc
445 @itemx -dp
446 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
452 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
461 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
462
463 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465 This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466 fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467 section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468 error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469 several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470 section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471 sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473 @smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492 @end smallexample
493
494 This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495 the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497 @kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498 @item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499 This option enables warnings when
500 @code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501 matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502 discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503 output region.
504
505 @cindex entry point, from command line
506 @kindex -e @var{entry}
507 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
508 @item -e @var{entry}
509 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
518 @kindex --exclude-libs
519 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
521 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
522 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527 be treated as hidden.
528
529 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540 regardless of this option.
541
542 @cindex dynamic symbol table
543 @kindex -E
544 @kindex --export-dynamic
545 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
546 @item -E
547 @itemx --export-dynamic
548 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
549 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
558
559 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562 linking the program itself.
563
564 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
565 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
566 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
567
568 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
572 @kindex --export-dynamic-symbol=@var{glob}
573 @cindex export dynamic symbol
574 @item --export-dynamic-symbol=@var{glob}
575 When creating a dynamically linked executable, symbols matching
576 @var{glob} will be added to the dynamic symbol table. When creating a
577 shared library, references to symbols matching @var{glob} will not be
578 bound to the definitions within the shared library. This option is a
579 no-op when creating a shared library and @samp{-Bsymbolic} or
580 @samp{--dynamic-list} are not specified. This option is only meaningful
581 on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
582
583 @kindex --export-dynamic-symbol-list=@var{file}
584 @cindex export dynamic symbol list
585 @item --export-dynamic-symbol-list=@var{file}
586 Specify a @samp{--export-dynamic-symbol} for each pattern in the file.
587 The format of the file is the same as the version node without
588 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
589
590 @ifclear SingleFormat
591 @cindex big-endian objects
592 @cindex endianness
593 @kindex -EB
594 @item -EB
595 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
596
597 @cindex little-endian objects
598 @kindex -EL
599 @item -EL
600 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
601 @end ifclear
602
603 @kindex -f @var{name}
604 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
605 @item -f @var{name}
606 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
607 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
608 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
609 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
610 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
611
612 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
613 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
614 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
615 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
616 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
617 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
618 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
619 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
620 machine-specific performance.
621
622 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
623 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
624
625 @kindex -F @var{name}
626 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
627 @item -F @var{name}
628 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
629 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
630 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
631 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
632 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
633
634 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
635 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
636 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
637 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
638 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
639 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
640 @var{name}.
641
642 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
643 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
644 object files.
645 @ifclear SingleFormat
646 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
647 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
648 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
649 environment variable.
650 @end ifclear
651 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
652 creating an ELF shared object.
653
654 @cindex finalization function
655 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
656 @item -fini=@var{name}
657 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
658 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
659 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
660 the function to call.
661
662 @kindex -g
663 @item -g
664 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
665
666 @kindex -G @var{value}
667 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
668 @cindex object size
669 @item -G @var{value}
670 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
671 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
672 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
673 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
674 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
675
676 @cindex runtime library name
677 @kindex -h @var{name}
678 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
679 @item -h @var{name}
680 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
681 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
682 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
683 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
684 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
685 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
686
687 @kindex -i
688 @cindex incremental link
689 @item -i
690 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
691
692 @cindex initialization function
693 @kindex -init=@var{name}
694 @item -init=@var{name}
695 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
696 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
697 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
698 function to call.
699
700 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
701 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
702 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
703 @item -l @var{namespec}
704 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
705 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
706 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
707 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
708 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
709 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
710
711 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
712 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
713 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
714 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
715 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
716 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
717 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
718 @var{filename}.
719
720 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
721 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
722 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
723 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
724 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
725 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
726
727 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
728 archives multiple times.
729
730 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
731
732 @ifset GENERIC
733 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
734 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
735 behaviour of the AIX linker.
736 @end ifset
737
738 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
739 @kindex -L @var{dir}
740 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
741 @item -L @var{searchdir}
742 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
743 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
744 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
745 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
746 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
747 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
748 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
749 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
750 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
751 option is specified.
752
753 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
754 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
755 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
756
757 @ifset UsesEnvVars
758 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
759 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
760 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
761 @end ifset
762
763 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
764 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
765 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
766
767 @cindex emulation
768 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
769 @item -m @var{emulation}
770 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
771 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
772
773 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
774 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
775
776 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
777 configured.
778
779 @cindex link map
780 @kindex -M
781 @kindex --print-map
782 @item -M
783 @itemx --print-map
784 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
785 information about the link, including the following:
786
787 @itemize @bullet
788 @item
789 Where object files are mapped into memory.
790 @item
791 How common symbols are allocated.
792 @item
793 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
794 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
795 @item
796 The values assigned to symbols.
797
798 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
799 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
800 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
801 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
802 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
803 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
804 linker script containing:
805
806 @smallexample
807 foo = 1
808 foo = foo * 4
809 foo = foo + 8
810 @end smallexample
811
812 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
813 option is used:
814
815 @smallexample
816 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
817 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
818 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
819 @end smallexample
820
821 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
822 scripts.
823
824 @item
825 How GNU properties are merged.
826
827 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
828 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
829 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
830
831 @smallexample
832 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
833 @end smallexample
834
835 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
836 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
837 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
838
839 @smallexample
840 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
841 @end smallexample
842
843 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
844 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
845 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
846 @end itemize
847
848 @cindex link map discarded
849 @kindex --print-map-discarded
850 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
851 @item --print-map-discarded
852 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
853 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
854 in the link map. Enabled by default.
855
856 @kindex -n
857 @cindex read-only text
858 @cindex NMAGIC
859 @kindex --nmagic
860 @item -n
861 @itemx --nmagic
862 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
863 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
864 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
865
866 @kindex -N
867 @kindex --omagic
868 @cindex read/write from cmd line
869 @cindex OMAGIC
870 @item -N
871 @itemx --omagic
872 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
873 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
874 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
875 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
876 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
877 specification published by Microsoft.
878
879 @kindex --no-omagic
880 @cindex OMAGIC
881 @item --no-omagic
882 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
883 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
884 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
885 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
886
887 @kindex -o @var{output}
888 @kindex --output=@var{output}
889 @cindex naming the output file
890 @item -o @var{output}
891 @itemx --output=@var{output}
892 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
893 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
894 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
895
896 @kindex -O @var{level}
897 @cindex generating optimized output
898 @item -O @var{level}
899 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
900 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
901 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
902 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
903 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
904 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
905 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
906
907 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
908 @item -plugin @var{name}
909 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
910 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
911 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
912 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
913 wish.
914
915 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
916 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
917 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
918 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
919 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
920 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
921 just copy in the newest one.
922
923 @kindex --push-state
924 @cindex push state governing input file handling
925 @item --push-state
926 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
927 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
928 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
929
930 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
931 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
932 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
933 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
934 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
935 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
936
937 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
938 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
939 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
940 something as follows:
941
942 @smallexample
943 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
944 @end smallexample
945
946 @kindex --pop-state
947 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
948 @item --pop-state
949 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
950 flags governing input file handling.
951
952 @kindex -q
953 @kindex --emit-relocs
954 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
955 @item -q
956 @itemx --emit-relocs
957 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
958 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
959 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
960 in larger executables.
961
962 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
963
964 @kindex --force-dynamic
965 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
966 @item --force-dynamic
967 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
968 to VxWorks targets.
969
970 @cindex partial link
971 @cindex relocatable output
972 @kindex -r
973 @kindex --relocatable
974 @item -r
975 @itemx --relocatable
976 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
977 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
978 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
979 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
980 @code{OMAGIC}.
981 @c ; see @option{-N}.
982 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
983 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
984 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
985
986 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
987 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
988 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
989 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
990 with input files in other formats at all.
991
992 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
993
994 @kindex -R @var{file}
995 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
996 @cindex symbol-only input
997 @item -R @var{filename}
998 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
999 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
1000 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
1001 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
1002 programs. You may use this option more than once.
1003
1004 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1005 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1006 the @option{-rpath} option.
1007
1008 @kindex -s
1009 @kindex --strip-all
1010 @cindex strip all symbols
1011 @item -s
1012 @itemx --strip-all
1013 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
1014
1015 @kindex -S
1016 @kindex --strip-debug
1017 @cindex strip debugger symbols
1018 @item -S
1019 @itemx --strip-debug
1020 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1021
1022 @kindex --strip-discarded
1023 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
1024 @item --strip-discarded
1025 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
1026 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1027 Enabled by default.
1028
1029 @kindex -t
1030 @kindex --trace
1031 @cindex input files, displaying
1032 @item -t
1033 @itemx --trace
1034 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1035 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1036 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1037 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1038 a linker bug report.
1039
1040 @kindex -T @var{script}
1041 @kindex --script=@var{script}
1042 @cindex script files
1043 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
1044 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1045 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
1046 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
1047 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
1048 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1049 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1050 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1051 options accumulate.
1052
1053 @kindex -dT @var{script}
1054 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1055 @cindex script files
1056 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1057 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1058 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1059
1060 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1061 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1062 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1063 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1064 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1065 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1066 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1067 @samp{gcc}).
1068
1069 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex undefined symbol
1072 @item -u @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1074 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1075 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1076 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1077 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1078 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1079
1080 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1081 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1082 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1083 instead.
1084
1085 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1086 @cindex symbols, require defined
1087 @cindex defined symbol
1088 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1089 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1090 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1091 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1092 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1093 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1094 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1095
1096 @kindex -Ur
1097 @cindex constructors
1098 @item -Ur
1099 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1100 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1101 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1102 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1103 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1104 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1105 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1106 @samp{-r} for the others.
1107
1108 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1109 @cindex orphan sections
1110 @cindex sections, orphan
1111 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1112 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1113 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1114
1115 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1116
1117 @table @code
1118 @item place
1119 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1120 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1121 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1122
1123 @item discard
1124 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1125 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1126
1127 @item warn
1128 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1129 issue a warning.
1130
1131 @item error
1132 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1133 @end table
1134
1135 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1136
1137 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1138 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1139 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1140 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1141 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1142 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1143 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1144 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1145 in a linker script.
1146
1147 @kindex -v
1148 @kindex -V
1149 @kindex --version
1150 @cindex version
1151 @item -v
1152 @itemx --version
1153 @itemx -V
1154 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1155 lists the supported emulations.
1156
1157 @kindex -x
1158 @kindex --discard-all
1159 @cindex deleting local symbols
1160 @item -x
1161 @itemx --discard-all
1162 Delete all local symbols.
1163
1164 @kindex -X
1165 @kindex --discard-locals
1166 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1167 @item -X
1168 @itemx --discard-locals
1169 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1170 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1171 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1172
1173 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1174 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1175 @cindex symbol tracing
1176 @item -y @var{symbol}
1177 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1178 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1179 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1180 to prepend an underscore.
1181
1182 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1183 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1184
1185 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1186 @item -Y @var{path}
1187 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1188 for Solaris compatibility.
1189
1190 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1191 @item -z @var{keyword}
1192 The recognized keywords are:
1193 @table @samp
1194
1195 @item bndplt
1196 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1197
1198 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1199 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1200 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1201 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1202 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1203 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1204 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1205 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1206 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1207 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1208 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1209
1210 @item cet-report=none
1211 @itemx cet-report=warning
1212 @itemx cet-report=error
1213 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1214 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1215 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1216 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1217 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1218 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1219 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1220 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1221 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1222 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1223 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1224
1225 @item combreloc
1226 @itemx nocombreloc
1227 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1228 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1229
1230 @item common
1231 @itemx nocommon
1232 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1233 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1234
1235 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1236 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1237 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1238 using pages of this size.
1239
1240 @item defs
1241 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1242 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1243 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1244
1245 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1246 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1247 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1248 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1249 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1250 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1251 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1252 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1253 these options.
1254
1255 @item execstack
1256 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1257
1258 @item global
1259 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1260 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1261 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1262
1263 @item globalaudit
1264 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1265 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1266 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1267 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1268 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1269 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1270
1271 @item ibtplt
1272 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1273 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1274
1275 @item ibt
1276 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1277 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1278 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1279
1280 @item initfirst
1281 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1282 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1283 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1284 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1285 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1286 objects.
1287
1288 @item interpose
1289 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1290 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1291 libraries not so marked.
1292
1293 @item lazy
1294 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1295 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1296 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1297 Lazy binding is the default.
1298
1299 @item loadfltr
1300 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1301
1302 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1303 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1304
1305 @item muldefs
1306 Allow multiple definitions.
1307
1308 @item nocopyreloc
1309 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1310 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1311
1312 @item nodefaultlib
1313 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1314 should ignore any default library search paths.
1315
1316 @item nodelete
1317 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1318
1319 @item nodlopen
1320 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1321
1322 @item nodump
1323 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1324
1325 @item noexecstack
1326 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1327
1328 @item noextern-protected-data
1329 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1330 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1331 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1332 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1333 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1334 i386 and x86-64.
1335
1336 @item noreloc-overflow
1337 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1338 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1339 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1340
1341 @item now
1342 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1343 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1344 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1345 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1346 called.
1347
1348 @item origin
1349 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1350
1351 @item relro
1352 @itemx norelro
1353 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1354 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1355 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1356 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1357 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1358
1359 @item separate-code
1360 @itemx noseparate-code
1361 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1362 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1363 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1364 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1365
1366 @item shstk
1367 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1368 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1369 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1370
1371 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1372 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1373 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1374 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1375
1376 @item text
1377 @itemx notext
1378 @itemx textoff
1379 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the position-independent
1380 or shared object has dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't
1381 report an error if @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1382
1383 @item undefs
1384 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1385 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1386 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1387
1388 @end table
1389
1390 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1391
1392 @kindex -(
1393 @cindex groups of archives
1394 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1395 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1396 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1397 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1398
1399 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1400 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1401 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1402 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1403 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1404 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1405 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1406 resolved.
1407
1408 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1409 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1410 more archives.
1411
1412 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1413 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1414 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1415 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1416 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1417 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1418 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1419 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1420 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1421 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1422 restore the old behaviour.
1423
1424 @kindex --as-needed
1425 @kindex --no-as-needed
1426 @item --as-needed
1427 @itemx --no-as-needed
1428 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1429 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1430 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1431 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1432 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1433 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1434 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1435 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1436 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1437 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1438 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1439 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1440 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1441
1442 @kindex --add-needed
1443 @kindex --no-add-needed
1444 @item --add-needed
1445 @itemx --no-add-needed
1446 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1447 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1448 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1449 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1450
1451 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1452 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1453 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1454
1455 @kindex -Bdynamic
1456 @kindex -dy
1457 @kindex -call_shared
1458 @item -Bdynamic
1459 @itemx -dy
1460 @itemx -call_shared
1461 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1462 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1463 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1464 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1465 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1466 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1467
1468 @kindex -Bgroup
1469 @item -Bgroup
1470 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1471 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1472 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1473 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1474 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1475
1476 @kindex -Bstatic
1477 @kindex -dn
1478 @kindex -non_shared
1479 @kindex -static
1480 @item -Bstatic
1481 @itemx -dn
1482 @itemx -non_shared
1483 @itemx -static
1484 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1485 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1486 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1487 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1488 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1489 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1490 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1491 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1492 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1493 libraries.
1494
1495 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1496 @item -Bsymbolic
1497 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1498 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1499 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1500 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1501 platforms which support shared libraries.
1502
1503 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1504 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1505 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1506 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1507 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1508 libraries.
1509
1510 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1511 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1512 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1513 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1514 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1515 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1516 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1517 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1518 which support shared libraries.
1519
1520 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1521 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1522
1523 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1524 @item --dynamic-list-data
1525 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1526
1527 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1528 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1529 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1530 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1531
1532 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1533 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1534 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1535
1536 @kindex --check-sections
1537 @kindex --no-check-sections
1538 @item --check-sections
1539 @itemx --no-check-sections
1540 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1541 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1542 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1543 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1544 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1545 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1546 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1547 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1548 option.
1549
1550 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1551 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1552 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1553 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1554 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1555 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1556 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1557 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1558 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1559 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1560 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1561 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1562
1563 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1564 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1565 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1566 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1567 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1568 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1569 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1570 symbols.
1571
1572 @cindex cross reference table
1573 @kindex --cref
1574 @item --cref
1575 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1576 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1577 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1578
1579 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1580 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1581 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1582 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1583 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1584 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1585 symbol are listed.
1586
1587 @cindex common allocation
1588 @kindex --no-define-common
1589 @item --no-define-common
1590 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1591 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1592 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1593
1594 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1595 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1596 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1597 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1598 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1599 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1600 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1601 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1602 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1603 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1604
1605 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1606 @cindex section groups
1607 @cindex COMDAT
1608 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1609 @item --force-group-allocation
1610 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1611 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1612 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1613 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1614 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1615 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1616
1617 @cindex symbols, from command line
1618 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1619 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1620 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1621 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1622 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1623 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1624 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1625 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1626 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1627 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1628 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1629 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1630
1631 @cindex demangling, from command line
1632 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1633 @kindex --no-demangle
1634 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1635 @itemx --no-demangle
1636 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1637 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1638 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1639 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1640 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1641 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1642 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1643 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1644 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1645
1646 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1647 @kindex -I@var{file}
1648 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1649 @item -I@var{file}
1650 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1651 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1652 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1653 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1654 doing.
1655
1656 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1657 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1658 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1659 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1660 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1661 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1662
1663 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1664 @item --embedded-relocs
1665 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1666 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1667 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1668 targets.
1669
1670 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1671 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1672 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1673 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1674
1675 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1676 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1677 @item --fatal-warnings
1678 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1679 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1680 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1681
1682 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1683 @item --force-exe-suffix
1684 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1685
1686 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1687 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1688 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1689 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1690 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1691 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1692
1693 @kindex --gc-sections
1694 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1695 @cindex garbage collection
1696 @item --gc-sections
1697 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1698 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1699 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1700 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1701 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1702 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1703 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1704
1705 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1706 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1707 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1708 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1709 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1710 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1711 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1712 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1713 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1714 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1715
1716 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1717 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1718 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1719 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1720 command in the linker script.
1721
1722 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1723 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1724 @cindex garbage collection
1725 @item --print-gc-sections
1726 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1727 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1728 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1729 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1730 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1731 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1732 line.
1733
1734 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1735 @cindex garbage collection
1736 @item --gc-keep-exported
1737 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1738 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1739 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1740 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1741 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1742 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1743 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1744 ELF format targets.
1745
1746 @kindex --print-output-format
1747 @cindex output format
1748 @item --print-output-format
1749 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1750 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1751 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1752
1753 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1754 @cindex memory usage
1755 @item --print-memory-usage
1756 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1757 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1758 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1759 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1760 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1761
1762 @smallexample
1763 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1764 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1765 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1766 @end smallexample
1767
1768 @cindex help
1769 @cindex usage
1770 @kindex --help
1771 @item --help
1772 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1773
1774 @kindex --target-help
1775 @item --target-help
1776 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1777
1778 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1779 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1780 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1781 @option{-M} option, above. Specifying a directory as @var{mapfile}
1782 causes the linker map to be written into a file inside the directory.
1783 The name of the file is based upon the @var{output} filename with
1784 @code{.map} appended.
1785
1786 @cindex memory usage
1787 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1788 @item --no-keep-memory
1789 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1790 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1791 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1792 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1793 while linking a large executable.
1794
1795 @kindex --no-undefined
1796 @kindex -z defs
1797 @kindex -z undefs
1798 @item --no-undefined
1799 @itemx -z defs
1800 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1801 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1802 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1803 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1804 libraries being linked in.
1805
1806 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1807
1808 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1809 @kindex -z muldefs
1810 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1811 @itemx -z muldefs
1812 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1813 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1814 first definition will be used.
1815
1816 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1817 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1818 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1819 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1820 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1821 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1822 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1823 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1824 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1825
1826 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1827 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1828 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1829 a shared library.
1830
1831 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1832 libraries specified at link time are that:
1833
1834 @itemize @bullet
1835 @item
1836 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1837 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1838 resolvable at load time.
1839 @item
1840 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1841 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1842
1843 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1844 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1845 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1846 appropriate memset function.
1847 @end itemize
1848
1849 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1850 @item --no-undefined-version
1851 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1852 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1853 will be issued instead.
1854
1855 @kindex --default-symver
1856 @item --default-symver
1857 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1858 exported symbols.
1859
1860 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1861 @item --default-imported-symver
1862 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1863 imported symbols.
1864
1865 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1866 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1867 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1868 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1869 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1870 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1871 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1872 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1873 inappropriate.
1874
1875 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1876 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1877 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1878 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1879
1880 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1881 @item --no-whole-archive
1882 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1883 archive files.
1884
1885 @cindex output file after errors
1886 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1887 @item --noinhibit-exec
1888 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1889 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1890 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1891 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1892
1893 @kindex -nostdlib
1894 @item -nostdlib
1895 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1896 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1897 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1898
1899 @ifclear SingleFormat
1900 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1901 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1902 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1903 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1904 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1905 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1906 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1907 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1908 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1909 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1910 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1911 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1912 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1913 @end ifclear
1914
1915 @kindex --out-implib
1916 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1917 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1918 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1919 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1920 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1921 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1922 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1923 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1924
1925 @kindex -pie
1926 @kindex --pic-executable
1927 @item -pie
1928 @itemx --pic-executable
1929 @cindex position independent executables
1930 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1931 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1932 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1933 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1934 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1935 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1936
1937 @kindex -qmagic
1938 @item -qmagic
1939 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1940
1941 @kindex -Qy
1942 @item -Qy
1943 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1944
1945 @kindex --relax
1946 @cindex synthesizing linker
1947 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1948 @cindex --no-relax
1949 @item --relax
1950 @itemx --no-relax
1951 An option with machine dependent effects.
1952 @ifset GENERIC
1953 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1954 @end ifset
1955 @ifset H8300
1956 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1957 @end ifset
1958 @ifset XTENSA
1959 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1960 @end ifset
1961 @ifset M68HC11
1962 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1963 @end ifset
1964 @ifset NIOSII
1965 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1966 @end ifset
1967 @ifset POWERPC
1968 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1969 @end ifset
1970
1971 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1972 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1973 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1974 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1975 instructions, and combining constant values.
1976
1977 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1978 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1979 @ifset GENERIC
1980 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1981 family of processors.
1982 @end ifset
1983
1984 @ifset GENERIC
1985 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1986 but ignored.
1987 @end ifset
1988
1989 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1990 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1991
1992 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1993 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1994 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1995 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1996 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1997 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1998 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1999 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
2000 @ifset GENERIC
2001 (such as VxWorks)
2002 @end ifset
2003 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
2004 run-time memory.
2005
2006 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
2007 or symbols needed for relocations.
2008
2009 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
2010 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
2011
2012 @ifset GENERIC
2013 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
2014 @cindex runtime library search path
2015 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
2016 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
2017 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
2018 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
2019 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
2020
2021 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2022 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2023 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2024 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2025 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2026
2027 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2028 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2029 is defined.
2030
2031 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
2032 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
2033 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2034 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2035 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2036 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
2037 file systems.
2038
2039 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
2040 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
2041 the @option{-rpath} option.
2042 @end ifset
2043
2044 @ifset GENERIC
2045 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
2046 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2047 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2048 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2049 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2050 of the input files.
2051
2052 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2053 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2054 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
2055 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
2056 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
2057 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2058 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2059 appearing multiple times.
2060
2061 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2062 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2063 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2064 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2065 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2066
2067 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2068 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2069 supported.
2070
2071 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2072 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2073 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2074 runtime linker would do.
2075
2076 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2077 libraries:
2078
2079 @enumerate
2080 @item
2081 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2082 @item
2083 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2084 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2085 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2086 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2087 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2088 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2089 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2090 @item
2091 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2092 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2093 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2094 @item
2095 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2096 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2097 @item
2098 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2099 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2100 @item
2101 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2102 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2103 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2104 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2105 @item
2106 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2107 @item
2108 For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2109 exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2110 to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2111 defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2112 configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2113 @item
2114 For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2115 the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2116 header file.
2117 @item
2118 Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2119 linker script being used.
2120 @end enumerate
2121
2122 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2123 warning and continue with the link.
2124 @end ifset
2125
2126 @kindex -shared
2127 @kindex -Bshareable
2128 @item -shared
2129 @itemx -Bshareable
2130 @cindex shared libraries
2131 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2132 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2133 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2134 undefined symbols in the link.
2135
2136 @kindex --sort-common
2137 @item --sort-common
2138 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2139 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2140 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2141 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2142 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2143 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2144 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2145 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2146
2147 @kindex --sort-section=name
2148 @item --sort-section=name
2149 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2150 patterns in the linker script.
2151
2152 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2153 @item --sort-section=alignment
2154 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2155 patterns in the linker script.
2156
2157 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2158 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2159 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2160 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2161 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2162
2163 @kindex --split-by-file
2164 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2165 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2166 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2167 size of 1 if not given.
2168
2169 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2170 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2171 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2172 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2173 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2174 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2175 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2176 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2177 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2178 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2179 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2180 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2181
2182 @kindex --stats
2183 @item --stats
2184 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2185 as execution time and memory usage.
2186
2187 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2188 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2189 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2190 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2191 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2192
2193 @kindex --task-link
2194 @item --task-link
2195 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2196 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2197
2198 @kindex --traditional-format
2199 @cindex traditional format
2200 @item --traditional-format
2201 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2202 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2203 use the traditional format instead.
2204
2205 @cindex dbx
2206 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2207 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2208 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2209 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2210 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2211 combine duplicate entries.
2212
2213 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2214 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2215 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2216 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2217 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2218 line.
2219 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2220 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2221 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2222 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2223 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2224
2225 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2226 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2227 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2228 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2229 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2230 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2231 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2232 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2233 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2234
2235 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2236 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2237 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2238 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2239 byte of the text segment.
2240
2241 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2242 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2243 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2244 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2245 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2246 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2247
2248 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2249 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2250 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2251 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2252 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2253
2254 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2255 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2256 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2257 values for @samp{method}:
2258
2259 @table @samp
2260 @item ignore-all
2261 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2262
2263 @item report-all
2264 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2265
2266 @item ignore-in-object-files
2267 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2268 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2269
2270 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2271 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2272 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2273 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2274 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2275 command line.
2276 @end table
2277
2278 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2279 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2280
2281 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2282 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2283 can change this to a warning.
2284
2285 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2286 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2287 @item --dll-verbose
2288 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2289 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2290 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2291 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2292 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2293
2294 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2295 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2296 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2297 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2298 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2299 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2300 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2301 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2302 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2303 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2304 @xref{WIN32}.
2305
2306 @kindex --warn-common
2307 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2308 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2309 @item --warn-common
2310 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2311 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2312 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2313 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2314 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2315 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2316
2317 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2318
2319 @table @samp
2320 @item int i = 1;
2321 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2322 file.
2323
2324 @item extern int i;
2325 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2326 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2327 variable somewhere.
2328
2329 @item int i;
2330 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2331 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2332 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2333 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2334 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2335 a definition of the same variable.
2336 @end table
2337
2338 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2339 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2340 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2341 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2342 a common symbol.
2343
2344 @enumerate
2345 @item
2346 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2347 definition for the symbol.
2348 @smallexample
2349 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2350 overridden by definition
2351 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2352 @end smallexample
2353
2354 @item
2355 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2356 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2357 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2358 @smallexample
2359 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2360 overriding common
2361 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2362 @end smallexample
2363
2364 @item
2365 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2366 @smallexample
2367 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2368 of `@var{symbol}'
2369 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2370 @end smallexample
2371
2372 @item
2373 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2374 @smallexample
2375 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2376 overridden by larger common
2377 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2378 @end smallexample
2379
2380 @item
2381 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2382 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2383 encountered in a different order.
2384 @smallexample
2385 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2386 overriding smaller common
2387 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2388 @end smallexample
2389 @end enumerate
2390
2391 @kindex --warn-constructors
2392 @item --warn-constructors
2393 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2394 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2395 detect the use of global constructors.
2396
2397 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2398 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2399 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2400 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2401 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2402 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2403 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2404 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2405 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2406 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2407 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2408 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2409 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2410
2411 @kindex --warn-once
2412 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2413 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2414 @item --warn-once
2415 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2416 which refers to it.
2417
2418 @kindex --warn-section-align
2419 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2420 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2421 @item --warn-section-align
2422 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2423 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2424 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2425 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2426 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2427
2428 @kindex --warn-textrel
2429 @item --warn-textrel
2430 Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent executable
2431 or shared object.
2432
2433 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2434 @item --warn-alternate-em
2435 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2436
2437 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2438 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2439 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2440 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2441 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2442
2443 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2444 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2445 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2446 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2447
2448 @kindex --whole-archive
2449 @cindex including an entire archive
2450 @item --whole-archive
2451 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2452 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2453 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2454 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2455 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2456 library. This option may be used more than once.
2457
2458 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2459 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2460 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2461 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2462 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2463
2464 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2465 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2466 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2467 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2468 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2469 @var{symbol}.
2470
2471 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2472 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2473 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2474 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2475
2476 Here is a trivial example:
2477
2478 @smallexample
2479 void *
2480 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2481 @{
2482 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2483 return __real_malloc (c);
2484 @}
2485 @end smallexample
2486
2487 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2488 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2489 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2490 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2491
2492 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2493 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2494 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2495 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2496 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2497
2498 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2499 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2500 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2501 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2502
2503 @smallexample
2504 int
2505 f (void)
2506 @{
2507 return 123;
2508 @}
2509
2510 int
2511 g (void)
2512 @{
2513 return f();
2514 @}
2515 @end smallexample
2516
2517 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2518 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2519 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2520 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2521 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2522 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2523 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2524
2525 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2526 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2527 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2528 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2529 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2530
2531 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2532 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2533 @item --enable-new-dtags
2534 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2535 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2536 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2537 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2538 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2539 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2540 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2541 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2542
2543 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2544 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2545 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2546 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2547 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2548 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2549 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2550
2551 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2552 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2553 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2554 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2555 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2556 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2557 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2558 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2559
2560 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2561 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2562 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2563 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2564 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2565 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2566 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2567 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2568 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2569 compressed using zlib.
2570
2571 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2572 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2573 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2574 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2575 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2576 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2577
2578 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2579 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2580
2581 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2582 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2583 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2584 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2585
2586 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2587 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2588 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2589 @option{--help} option.
2590
2591 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2592 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2593 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2594 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2595 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2596 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2597
2598 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2599 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2600 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2601 has been used.
2602
2603 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2604 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2605
2606 @kindex --build-id
2607 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2608 @item --build-id
2609 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2610 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2611 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2612 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2613 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2614 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2615 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2616 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2617 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2618 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2619 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2620
2621 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2622 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2623 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2624 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2625 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2626 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2627
2628 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2629 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2630 @end table
2631
2632 @c man end
2633
2634 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2635
2636 @c man begin OPTIONS
2637
2638 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2639 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2640 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2641 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2642 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2643 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2644 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2645 object file).
2646
2647 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2648 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2649 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2650 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2651
2652 @table @gcctabopt
2653
2654 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2655 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2656 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2657 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2658 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2659
2660 @kindex --base-file
2661 @item --base-file @var{file}
2662 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2663 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2664 @file{dlltool}.
2665 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2666
2667 @kindex --dll
2668 @item --dll
2669 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2670 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2671 file.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2675 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2676 @item --enable-long-section-names
2677 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2678 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2679 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2680 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2681 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2682 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2683 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2684 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2685 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2686 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2687 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2688 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2689 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2690 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2691 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2692 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2693 image and not stripping symbols.
2694 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2695
2696 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2697 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2698 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2699 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2700 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2701 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2702 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2703 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2704 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2705 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2706 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2707 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2708 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2709 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2710 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2711 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2712 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2713 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2714
2715 @kindex --leading-underscore
2716 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2717 @item --leading-underscore
2718 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2719 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2720 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2721 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2722
2723 @cindex DLLs, creating
2724 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2725 @item --export-all-symbols
2726 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2727 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2728 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2729 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2730 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2731 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2732 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2733 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2734 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2735 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2736 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2737 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2738 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2739 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2740 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2741 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2742 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2743 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2744 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2745 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2746 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2747 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2748 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2749
2750 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2751 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2752 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2753 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2754 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2755
2756 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2757 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2758 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @kindex --file-alignment
2762 @item --file-alignment
2763 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2764 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2765 512.
2766 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2767
2768 @cindex heap size
2769 @kindex --heap
2770 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2771 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2772 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2773 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2774 committed.
2775 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2776
2777 @cindex image base
2778 @kindex --image-base
2779 @item --image-base @var{value}
2780 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2781 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2782 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2783 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2784 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2785 for dlls.
2786 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2787
2788 @kindex --kill-at
2789 @item --kill-at
2790 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2791 symbols before they are exported.
2792 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794 @kindex --large-address-aware
2795 @item --large-address-aware
2796 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2797 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2798 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2799 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2800 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2801 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2802
2803 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2804 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2805 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2806 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2807 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2808 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2809 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2810
2811 @kindex --major-image-version
2812 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2813 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2814 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2815
2816 @kindex --major-os-version
2817 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2818 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2819 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2820
2821 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2822 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2823 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2824 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2825
2826 @kindex --minor-image-version
2827 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2828 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2829 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2830
2831 @kindex --minor-os-version
2832 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2833 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2834 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2835
2836 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2837 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2838 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2839 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2840
2841 @cindex DEF files, creating
2842 @cindex DLLs, creating
2843 @kindex --output-def
2844 @item --output-def @var{file}
2845 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2846 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2847 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2848 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2849 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2850 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2851
2852 @cindex DLLs, creating
2853 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2854 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2855 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2856 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2857 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2858 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2859 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2860 execution are avoided.
2861 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2862
2863 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2864 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2865 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2866 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2867 default.
2868 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2869
2870 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2871 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2872 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2873 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2874 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2875 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2876 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2877 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2878 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2879 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2880
2881 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2882 @item --enable-auto-import
2883 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2884 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2885 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2886 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2887
2888 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2889 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2890
2891 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2892 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2893 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2894
2895 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2896 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2897 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2898 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2899 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2900
2901 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2902 see this message:
2903
2904 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2905 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2906
2907 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2908 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2909 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2910 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2911 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2912 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2913 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2914 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2915 the warning, and exit.
2916
2917 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2918 data type of the exported variable:
2919
2920 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2921 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2922 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2923
2924 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2925 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2926 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2927 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2928
2929 @example
2930 extern type extern_array[];
2931 extern_array[1] -->
2932 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2933 @end example
2934
2935 or
2936
2937 @example
2938 extern type extern_array[];
2939 extern_array[1] -->
2940 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2941 @end example
2942
2943 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2944 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2945
2946 @example
2947 extern struct s extern_struct;
2948 extern_struct.field -->
2949 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2950 @end example
2951
2952 or
2953
2954 @example
2955 extern long long extern_ll;
2956 extern_ll -->
2957 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2958 @end example
2959
2960 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2961 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2962 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2963 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2964 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2965 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2966 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2967 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2968
2969 Original:
2970 @example
2971 --foo.h
2972 extern int arr[];
2973 --foo.c
2974 #include "foo.h"
2975 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2976 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2977 @}
2978 @end example
2979
2980 Solution 1:
2981 @example
2982 --foo.h
2983 extern int arr[];
2984 --foo.c
2985 #include "foo.h"
2986 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2987 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2988 volatile int *parr = arr;
2989 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2990 @}
2991 @end example
2992
2993 Solution 2:
2994 @example
2995 --foo.h
2996 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2997 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2998 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2999 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
3000 #else
3001 #define FOO_IMPORT
3002 #endif
3003 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
3004 --foo.c
3005 #include "foo.h"
3006 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
3007 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
3008 @}
3009 @end example
3010
3011 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
3012 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
3013 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
3014 functions).
3015
3016 @kindex --disable-auto-import
3017 @item --disable-auto-import
3018 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
3019 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
3020 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3021
3022 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3023 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3024 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3025 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3026 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
3027 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
3028 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3029
3030 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3031 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3032 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
3033 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3034
3035 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3036 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3037 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
3038 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3039
3040 @kindex --section-alignment
3041 @item --section-alignment
3042 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3043 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
3044 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3045
3046 @cindex stack size
3047 @kindex --stack
3048 @item --stack @var{reserve}
3049 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
3050 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
3051 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
3052 committed.
3053 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3054
3055 @kindex --subsystem
3056 @item --subsystem @var{which}
3057 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3058 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3059 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3060 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
3061 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3062 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3063 @var{which}.
3064 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3065
3066 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3067 of the PE file header:
3068 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3069
3070 @kindex --high-entropy-va
3071 @item --high-entropy-va
3072 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3073 (ASLR).
3074 This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3075 @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3076
3077 @kindex --dynamicbase
3078 @item --dynamicbase
3079 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3080 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3081 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3082 This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3083
3084 @kindex --forceinteg
3085 @item --forceinteg
3086 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3087
3088 @kindex --nxcompat
3089 @item --nxcompat
3090 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3091 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3092
3093 @kindex --no-isolation
3094 @item --no-isolation
3095 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3096
3097 @kindex --no-seh
3098 @item --no-seh
3099 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3100 this image.
3101
3102 @kindex --no-bind
3103 @item --no-bind
3104 Do not bind this image.
3105
3106 @kindex --wdmdriver
3107 @item --wdmdriver
3108 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3109
3110 @kindex --tsaware
3111 @item --tsaware
3112 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3113
3114 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3115 @item --insert-timestamp
3116 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3117 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3118 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3119 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3120 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3121 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3122 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3123 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3124 identically.
3125
3126 @kindex --enable-reloc-section
3127 @item --enable-reloc-section
3128 Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3129 is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3130 @end table
3131
3132 @c man end
3133
3134 @ifset C6X
3135 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3136
3137 @c man begin OPTIONS
3138
3139 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3140 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3141 all executables use an index of 0.
3142
3143 @table @gcctabopt
3144
3145 @kindex --dsbt-size
3146 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3147 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3148 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3149 entries.
3150
3151 @kindex --dsbt-index
3152 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3153 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3154 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3155 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3156 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3157
3158 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3159 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3160 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3161
3162 @end table
3163
3164 @c man end
3165 @end ifset
3166
3167 @ifset CSKY
3168 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3169
3170 @c man begin OPTIONS
3171
3172 @table @gcctabopt
3173
3174 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3175 @item --branch-stub
3176 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3177 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3178 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3179 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3180 the compiler or assembler.
3181
3182 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3183 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3184 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3185 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3186 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3187 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3188 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3189 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3190 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3191
3192 @end table
3193
3194 @c man end
3195 @end ifset
3196
3197 @ifset M68HC11
3198 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3199
3200 @c man begin OPTIONS
3201
3202 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3203 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3204
3205 @table @gcctabopt
3206
3207 @kindex --no-trampoline
3208 @item --no-trampoline
3209 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3210 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3211 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3212
3213 @kindex --bank-window
3214 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3215 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3216 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3217 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3218 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3219
3220 @end table
3221
3222 @c man end
3223 @end ifset
3224
3225 @ifset M68K
3226 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3227
3228 @c man begin OPTIONS
3229
3230 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3231 when linking for 68K targets.
3232
3233 @table @gcctabopt
3234
3235 @kindex --got
3236 @item --got=@var{type}
3237 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3238 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3239 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3240 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3241
3242 @end table
3243
3244 @c man end
3245 @end ifset
3246
3247 @ifset MIPS
3248 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3249
3250 @c man begin OPTIONS
3251
3252 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3253 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3254 linking for MIPS targets.
3255
3256 @table @gcctabopt
3257
3258 @kindex --insn32
3259 @item --insn32
3260 @kindex --no-insn32
3261 @itemx --no-insn32
3262 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3263 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3264 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3265 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3266 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3267 possible.
3268
3269 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3270 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3271 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3272 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3273 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3274 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3275 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3276 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3277 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3278 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3279 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3280 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3281 an error.
3282
3283 @kindex --compact-branches
3284 @item --compact-branches
3285 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3286 @itemx --no-compact-branches
3287 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3288 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3289
3290 @end table
3291
3292 @c man end
3293 @end ifset
3294
3295
3296 @ifset PDP11
3297 @subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3298
3299 @c man begin OPTIONS
3300
3301 For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3302 produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3303 for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3304 targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3305 defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3306 here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3307
3308 @table @gcctabopt
3309
3310 @kindex -N
3311 @item -N
3312 @kindex --omagic
3313 @itemx --omagic
3314
3315 Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3316 indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3317 shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3318 writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3319 the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3320 programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3321 from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3322
3323 @kindex -n
3324 @item -n
3325 @kindex --nmagic
3326 @itemx --nmagic
3327
3328 Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3329 indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3330 be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3331 file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3332 byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3333 a @emph{pure executable} format.
3334
3335 @kindex -z
3336 @item -z
3337 @kindex --imagic
3338 @itemx --imagic
3339
3340 Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3341 indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3342 data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3343 instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3344 larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3345 to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3346 shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3347 option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3348 and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3349 this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3350 executable} format.
3351
3352 @kindex --no-omagic
3353 @item --no-omagic
3354
3355 Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3356
3357 @end table
3358
3359 @c man end
3360 @end ifset
3361
3362 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3363 @node Environment
3364 @section Environment Variables
3365
3366 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3367
3368 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3369 @ifclear SingleFormat
3370 @code{GNUTARGET},
3371 @end ifclear
3372 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3373
3374 @ifclear SingleFormat
3375 @kindex GNUTARGET
3376 @cindex default input format
3377 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3378 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3379 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3380 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3381 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3382 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3383 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3384 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3385 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3386 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3387 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3388 @end ifclear
3389
3390 @kindex LDEMULATION
3391 @cindex default emulation
3392 @cindex emulation, default
3393 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3394 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3395 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3396 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3397 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3398 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3399 linker was configured.
3400
3401 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3402 @cindex demangling, default
3403 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3404 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3405 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3406 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3407 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3408 options.
3409
3410 @c man end
3411 @end ifset
3412
3413 @node Scripts
3414 @chapter Linker Scripts
3415
3416 @cindex scripts
3417 @cindex linker scripts
3418 @cindex command files
3419 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3420 written in the linker command language.
3421
3422 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3423 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3424 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3425 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3426 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3427 described below.
3428
3429 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3430 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3431 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3432 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3433 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3434
3435 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3436 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3437 default linker script.
3438
3439 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3440 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3441 Linker Scripts}.
3442
3443 @menu
3444 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3445 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3446 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3447 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3448 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3449 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3450 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3451 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3452 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3453 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3454 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3455 @end menu
3456
3457 @node Basic Script Concepts
3458 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3459 @cindex linker script concepts
3460 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3461 describe the linker script language.
3462
3463 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3464 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3465 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3466 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3467 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3468 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3469 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3470 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3471
3472 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3473 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3474 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3475 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3476 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3477 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3478 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3479 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3480 of debugging information.
3481
3482 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3483 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3484 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3485 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3486 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3487 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3488 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3489 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3490 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3491 RAM address would be the VMA.
3492
3493 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3494 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3495
3496 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3497 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3498 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3499 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3500 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3501 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3502 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3503
3504 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3505 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3506 option.
3507
3508 @node Script Format
3509 @section Linker Script Format
3510 @cindex linker script format
3511 Linker scripts are text files.
3512
3513 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3514 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3515 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3516 generally ignored.
3517
3518 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3519 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3520 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3521 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3522 file name.
3523
3524 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3525 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3526 to whitespace.
3527
3528 @node Simple Example
3529 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3530 @cindex linker script example
3531 @cindex example of linker script
3532 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3533
3534 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3535 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3536 memory layout of the output file.
3537
3538 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3539 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3540 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3541 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3542 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3543 your input files.
3544
3545 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3546 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3547 linker script which will do that:
3548 @smallexample
3549 SECTIONS
3550 @{
3551 . = 0x10000;
3552 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3553 . = 0x8000000;
3554 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3555 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3556 @}
3557 @end smallexample
3558
3559 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3560 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3561 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3562
3563 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3564 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3565 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3566 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3567 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3568 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3569 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3570
3571 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3572 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3573 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3574 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3575 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3576 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3577
3578 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3579 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3580 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3581
3582 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3583 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3584 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3585 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3586 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3587 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3588 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3589
3590 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3591 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3592 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3593 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3594 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3595 sections.
3596
3597 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3598
3599 @node Simple Commands
3600 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3601 @cindex linker script simple commands
3602 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3603
3604 @menu
3605 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3606 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3607 @ifclear SingleFormat
3608 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3609 @end ifclear
3610
3611 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3612 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3613 @end menu
3614
3615 @node Entry Point
3616 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3617 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3618 @cindex start of execution
3619 @cindex first instruction
3620 @cindex entry point
3621 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3622 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3623 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3624 @smallexample
3625 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3626 @end smallexample
3627
3628 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3629 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3630 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3631 @itemize @bullet
3632 @item
3633 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3634 @item
3635 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3636 @item
3637 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3638 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3639 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3640 @item
3641 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3642 @item
3643 The address @code{0}.
3644 @end itemize
3645
3646 @node File Commands
3647 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3648 @cindex linker script file commands
3649 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3650
3651 @table @code
3652 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3653 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3654 @cindex including a linker script
3655 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3656 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3657 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3658 10 levels deep.
3659
3660 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3661 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3662
3663 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3664 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3665 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3666 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3667 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3668 @cindex linker script input object files
3669 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3670 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3671
3672 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3673 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3674 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3675
3676 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3677 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3678
3679 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3680 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3681 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3682 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying
3683 @code{=} as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the
3684 filename path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of
3685 @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3686
3687 If a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is not used then the linker will try to open
3688 the file in the directory containing the linker script. If it is not
3689 found the linker will then search the current directory. If it is still
3690 not found the linker will search through the archive library search
3691 path.
3692
3693 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3694 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3695 @samp{-l}.
3696
3697 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3698 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3699 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3700
3701 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3702 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3703 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3704 @cindex grouping input files
3705 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3706 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3707 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3708 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3709
3710 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3711 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3712 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3713 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3714 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3715 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3716 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3717 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3718 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3719 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3720 setting afterwards.
3721
3722 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3723 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3724 @cindex output file name in linker script
3725 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3726 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3727 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3728 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3729 precedence.
3730
3731 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3732 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3733
3734 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3735 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3736 @cindex library search path in linker script
3737 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3738 @cindex search path in linker script
3739 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3740 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3741 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3742 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3743 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3744 the command-line option are searched first.
3745
3746 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3747 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3748 @cindex first input file
3749 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3750 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3751 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3752 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3753 first file.
3754 @end table
3755
3756 @ifclear SingleFormat
3757 @node Format Commands
3758 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3759 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3760
3761 @table @code
3762 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3763 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3764 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3765 @cindex output file format in linker script
3766 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3767 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3768 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3769 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3770 line option takes precedence.
3771
3772 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3773 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3774 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3775 desired endianness.
3776
3777 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3778 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3779 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3780 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3781
3782 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3783 command:
3784 @smallexample
3785 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3786 @end smallexample
3787 This says that the default format for the output file is
3788 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3789 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3790 format.
3791
3792 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3793 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3794 @cindex input file format in linker script
3795 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3796 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3797 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3798 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3799 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3800 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3801 @end table
3802 @end ifclear
3803
3804 @node REGION_ALIAS
3805 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3806 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3807 @cindex region alias
3808 @cindex region names
3809
3810 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3811 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3812
3813 @smallexample
3814 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3815 @end smallexample
3816
3817 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3818 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3819 to memory regions. An example follows.
3820
3821 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3822 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3823 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3824 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3825 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3826 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3827 sections:
3828
3829 @itemize @bullet
3830 @item
3831 @code{.text} program code;
3832 @item
3833 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3834 @item
3835 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3836 @item
3837 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3838 @end itemize
3839
3840 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3841 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3842 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3843 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3844 @code{C}:
3845 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3846 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3847 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3848 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3849 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3850 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3851 @end multitable
3852 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3853 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3854 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3855 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3856
3857 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3858 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3859 memory layout:
3860 @smallexample
3861 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3862
3863 SECTIONS
3864 @{
3865 .text :
3866 @{
3867 *(.text)
3868 @} > REGION_TEXT
3869 .rodata :
3870 @{
3871 *(.rodata)
3872 rodata_end = .;
3873 @} > REGION_RODATA
3874 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3875 @{
3876 data_start = .;
3877 *(.data)
3878 @} > REGION_DATA
3879 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3880 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3881 .bss :
3882 @{
3883 *(.bss)
3884 @} > REGION_BSS
3885 @}
3886 @end smallexample
3887
3888 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3889 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3890 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3891 @table @code
3892 @item A
3893 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3894 @smallexample
3895 MEMORY
3896 @{
3897 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3898 @}
3899
3900 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3901 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3902 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3903 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3904 @end smallexample
3905 @item B
3906 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3907 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3908 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3909 @smallexample
3910 MEMORY
3911 @{
3912 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3913 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3914 @}
3915
3916 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3917 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3918 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3919 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3920 @end smallexample
3921 @item C
3922 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3923 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3924 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3925 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3926 @smallexample
3927 MEMORY
3928 @{
3929 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3930 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3931 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3932 @}
3933
3934 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3935 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3936 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3937 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3938 @end smallexample
3939 @end table
3940
3941 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3942 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3943 necessary:
3944 @smallexample
3945 #include <string.h>
3946
3947 extern char data_start [];
3948 extern char data_size [];
3949 extern char data_load_start [];
3950
3951 void copy_data(void)
3952 @{
3953 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3954 @{
3955 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3956 @}
3957 @}
3958 @end smallexample
3959
3960 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3961 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3962 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3963
3964 @table @code
3965 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3966 @kindex ASSERT
3967 @cindex assertion in linker script
3968 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3969 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3970
3971 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3972 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3973 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3974 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3975 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3976
3977 @smallexample
3978 .stack :
3979 @{
3980 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3981 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3982 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3983 @}
3984 @end smallexample
3985
3986 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3987 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3988 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3989
3990 @smallexample
3991 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3992 .stack :
3993 @{
3994 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3995 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3996 @}
3997 @end smallexample
3998
3999 will work.
4000
4001 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
4002 @kindex EXTERN
4003 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
4004 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
4005 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
4006 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
4007 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
4008 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
4009
4010 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4011 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4012 @cindex common allocation in linker script
4013 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
4014 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
4015 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
4016
4017 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4018 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
4019 @cindex common allocation in linker script
4020 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
4021 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
4022 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
4023
4024 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4025 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4026 @cindex group allocation in linker script
4027 @cindex section groups
4028 @cindex COMDAT
4029 This command has the same effect as the
4030 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4031 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4032 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4033 specified (@samp{-r}).
4034
4035 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4036 @kindex INSERT
4037 @cindex insert user script into default script
4038 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4039 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4040 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4041 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4042 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4043 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4044 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4045 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4046 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4047 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4048 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4049 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4050 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4051
4052 @smallexample
4053 SECTIONS
4054 @{
4055 OVERLAY :
4056 @{
4057 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4058 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4059 @}
4060 @}
4061 INSERT AFTER .text;
4062 @end smallexample
4063
4064 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4065 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4066 @cindex cross references
4067 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4068 references among certain output sections.
4069
4070 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4071 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4072 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4073 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4074 a function defined in the other section.
4075
4076 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
4077 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
4078 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4079 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4080 names.
4081
4082 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4083 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4084 @cindex cross references
4085 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4086 references to one section from a list of other sections.
4087
4088 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4089 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4090 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4091 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4092 must never call back.
4093
4094 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4095 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4096 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4097 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4098 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4099 names, not input section names.
4100
4101 @ifclear SingleFormat
4102 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4103 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4104 @cindex machine architecture
4105 @cindex architecture
4106 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4107 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4108 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4109 the @samp{-f} option.
4110 @end ifclear
4111
4112 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4113 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4114 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4115 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4116 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4117 @xref{Expression Section}.
4118 @end table
4119
4120 @node Assignments
4121 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
4122 @cindex assignment in scripts
4123 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
4124 @cindex variables, defining
4125 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
4126 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
4127
4128 @menu
4129 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
4130 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
4131 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
4132 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4133 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
4134 @end menu
4135
4136 @node Simple Assignments
4137 @subsection Simple Assignments
4138
4139 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4140
4141 @table @code
4142 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4143 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4144 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4145 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4146 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4147 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4148 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4149 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4150 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4151 @end table
4152
4153 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4154 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4155 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4156
4157 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4158 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4159
4160 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4161
4162 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4163
4164 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4165 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4166 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4167
4168 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4169 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4170
4171 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4172 assignments may be used:
4173
4174 @smallexample
4175 floating_point = 0;
4176 SECTIONS
4177 @{
4178 .text :
4179 @{
4180 *(.text)
4181 _etext = .;
4182 @}
4183 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4184 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4185 @}
4186 @end smallexample
4187 @noindent
4188 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4189 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4190 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4191 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4192 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4193
4194 @node HIDDEN
4195 @subsection HIDDEN
4196 @cindex HIDDEN
4197 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4198 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4199
4200 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4201 @code{HIDDEN}:
4202
4203 @smallexample
4204 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4205 SECTIONS
4206 @{
4207 .text :
4208 @{
4209 *(.text)
4210 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4211 @}
4212 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4213 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4214 @}
4215 @end smallexample
4216 @noindent
4217 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4218
4219 @node PROVIDE
4220 @subsection PROVIDE
4221 @cindex PROVIDE
4222 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4223 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4224 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4225 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4226 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4227 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4228 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4229 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4230
4231 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4232 @smallexample
4233 SECTIONS
4234 @{
4235 .text :
4236 @{
4237 *(.text)
4238 _etext = .;
4239 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4240 @}
4241 @}
4242 @end smallexample
4243
4244 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4245 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4246 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4247 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4248 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4249 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4250
4251 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4252 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4253 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4254 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4255 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4256
4257 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4258 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4259 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4260 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4261 hidden and won't be exported.
4262
4263 @node Source Code Reference
4264 @subsection Source Code Reference
4265
4266 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4267 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4268 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4269 symbol that does not have a value.
4270
4271 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4272 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4273 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4274 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4275 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4276 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4277 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4278 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4279
4280 @smallexample
4281 extern int foo;
4282 @end smallexample
4283
4284 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4285
4286 @smallexample
4287 _foo = 1000;
4288 @end smallexample
4289
4290 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4291 transformation has taken place.
4292
4293 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4294 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4295 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4296 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4297 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4298 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4299 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4300
4301 @smallexample
4302 int foo = 1000;
4303 @end smallexample
4304
4305 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4306 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4307 number 1000 is initially stored.
4308
4309 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4310 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4311 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4312 So:
4313
4314 @smallexample
4315 foo = 1;
4316 @end smallexample
4317
4318 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4319 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4320 address. Whereas:
4321
4322 @smallexample
4323 int * a = & foo;
4324 @end smallexample
4325
4326 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4327 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4328 the variable @samp{a}.
4329
4330 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4331 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4332 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4333
4334 @smallexample
4335 foo = 1000;
4336 @end smallexample
4337
4338 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4339 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4340 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4341 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4342 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4343
4344 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4345 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4346 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4347 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4348 linker script contains these declarations:
4349
4350 @smallexample
4351 @group
4352 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4353 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4354 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4355 @end group
4356 @end smallexample
4357
4358 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4359
4360 @smallexample
4361 @group
4362 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4363
4364 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4365 @end group
4366 @end smallexample
4367
4368 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4369 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4370 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4371
4372 @smallexample
4373 @group
4374 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4375
4376 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4377 @end group
4378 @end smallexample
4379
4380 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4381 operators.
4382
4383 @node SECTIONS
4384 @section SECTIONS Command
4385 @kindex SECTIONS
4386 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4387 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4388
4389 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4390 @smallexample
4391 SECTIONS
4392 @{
4393 @var{sections-command}
4394 @var{sections-command}
4395 @dots{}
4396 @}
4397 @end smallexample
4398
4399 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4400
4401 @itemize @bullet
4402 @item
4403 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4404 @item
4405 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4406 @item
4407 an output section description
4408 @item
4409 an overlay description
4410 @end itemize
4411
4412 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4413 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4414 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4415 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4416 the layout of the output file.
4417
4418 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4419 below.
4420
4421 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4422 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4423 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4424 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4425 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4426 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4427
4428 @menu
4429 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4430 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4431 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4432 * Input Section:: Input section description
4433 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4434 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4435 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4436 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4437 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4438 @end menu
4439
4440 @node Output Section Description
4441 @subsection Output Section Description
4442 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4443 @smallexample
4444 @group
4445 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4446 [AT(@var{lma})]
4447 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4448 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4449 [@var{constraint}]
4450 @{
4451 @var{output-section-command}
4452 @var{output-section-command}
4453 @dots{}
4454 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4455 @end group
4456 @end smallexample
4457
4458 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4459
4460 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4461 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4462 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4463 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4464 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4465
4466 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4467
4468 @itemize @bullet
4469 @item
4470 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4471 @item
4472 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4473 @item
4474 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4475 @item
4476 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4477 @end itemize
4478
4479 @node Output Section Name
4480 @subsection Output Section Name
4481 @cindex name, section
4482 @cindex section name
4483 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4484 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4485 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4486 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4487 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4488 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4489 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4490 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4491 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4492 commas must be quoted.
4493
4494 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4495 Discarding}.
4496
4497 @node Output Section Address
4498 @subsection Output Section Address
4499 @cindex address, section
4500 @cindex section address
4501 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4502 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4503 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4504
4505 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4506 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4507 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4508 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4509 contained within the output section.
4510
4511 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4512
4513 @itemize @bullet
4514 @item
4515 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4516 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4517 in that region.
4518
4519 @item
4520 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4521 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4522 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4523 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4524
4525 @item
4526 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4527 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4528 counter.
4529 @end itemize
4530
4531 @noindent
4532 For example:
4533
4534 @smallexample
4535 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4536 @end smallexample
4537
4538 @noindent
4539 and
4540
4541 @smallexample
4542 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4543 @end smallexample
4544
4545 @noindent
4546 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4547 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4548 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4549 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4550 input sections.
4551
4552 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4553 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4554 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4555 do something like this:
4556 @smallexample
4557 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4558 @end smallexample
4559 @noindent
4560 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4561 aligned upward to the specified value.
4562
4563 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4564 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4565 sections are ignored).
4566
4567 @node Input Section
4568 @subsection Input Section Description
4569 @cindex input sections
4570 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4571 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4572
4573 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4574 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4575 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4576 map the input files into your memory layout.
4577
4578 @menu
4579 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4580 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4581 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4582 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4583 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4584 @end menu
4585
4586 @node Input Section Basics
4587 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4588 @cindex input section basics
4589 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4590 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4591
4592 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4593 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4594
4595 The most common input section description is to include all input
4596 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4597 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4598 @smallexample
4599 *(.text)
4600 @end smallexample
4601 @noindent
4602 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4603 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4604 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4605 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4606 example:
4607 @smallexample
4608 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4609 @end smallexample
4610 @noindent
4611 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4612 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4613 placed inside the section list, for example:
4614 @smallexample
4615 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4616 @end smallexample
4617 @noindent
4618 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4619 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4620 more than one section, as described below.
4621
4622 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4623 @smallexample
4624 *(.text .rdata)
4625 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4626 @end smallexample
4627 @noindent
4628 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4629 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4630 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4631 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4632 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4633 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4634
4635 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4636 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4637 immediately following section, for example:
4638 @smallexample
4639 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4640 @end smallexample
4641 @noindent
4642 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4643 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4644 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4645 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4646 could be modified to:
4647 @smallexample
4648 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4649 @end smallexample
4650 @noindent
4651 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4652 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4653 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4654 @smallexample
4655 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4656 @end smallexample
4657
4658 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4659 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4660 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4661 @smallexample
4662 data.o(.data)
4663 @end smallexample
4664
4665 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4666 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4667
4668 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4669
4670 @smallexample
4671 @group
4672 SECTIONS @{
4673 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4674 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4675 @}
4676 @end group
4677 @end smallexample
4678
4679 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4680 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4681 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4682 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4683 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4684
4685 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4686 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4687 with no whitespace around the colon.
4688
4689 @table @samp
4690 @item archive:file
4691 matches file within archive
4692 @item archive:
4693 matches the whole archive
4694 @item :file
4695 matches file but not one in an archive
4696 @end table
4697
4698 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4699 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4700 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4701 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4702 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4703 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4704 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4705 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4706 command.
4707
4708 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4709 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4710 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4711 @smallexample
4712 data.o
4713 @end smallexample
4714
4715 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4716 and does not contain any wild card
4717 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4718 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4719 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4720 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4721 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4722 the archive search path.
4723
4724 @node Input Section Wildcards
4725 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4726 @cindex input section wildcards
4727 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4728 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4729 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4730 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4731 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4732
4733 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4734 pattern for the file name.
4735
4736 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4737
4738 @table @samp
4739 @item *
4740 matches any number of characters
4741 @item ?
4742 matches any single character
4743 @item [@var{chars}]
4744 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4745 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4746 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4747 @item \
4748 quotes the following character
4749 @end table
4750
4751 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4752 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4753 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4754 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4755 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4756 a @samp{/} character.
4757
4758 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4759 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4760 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4761
4762 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4763 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4764 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4765 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4766 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4767 @smallexample
4768 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4769 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4770 @end smallexample
4771
4772 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4773 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4774 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4775 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4776 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4777 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4778 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4779
4780 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4781 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4782 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4783 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4784 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4785 needed.
4786
4787 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4788 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4789 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4790 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4791 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4792 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4793 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4794 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4795
4796 @cindex SORT
4797 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4798
4799 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4800 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4801
4802 @enumerate
4803 @item
4804 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4805 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4806 sections have the same name.
4807 @item
4808 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4809 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4810 sections have the same alignment.
4811 @item
4812 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4813 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4814 @item
4815 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4816 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4817 @item
4818 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4819 @end enumerate
4820
4821 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4822 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4823 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4824
4825 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4826 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4827 treated as nested sorting command.
4828
4829 @enumerate
4830 @item
4831 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4832 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4833 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4834 @item
4835 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4836 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4837 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4838 @end enumerate
4839
4840 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4841 command-line option will be ignored.
4842
4843 @cindex SORT_NONE
4844 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4845 section sorting option.
4846
4847 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4848 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4849 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4850
4851 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4852 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4853 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4854 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4855 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4856 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4857 @smallexample
4858 @group
4859 SECTIONS @{
4860 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4861 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4862 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4863 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4864 @}
4865 @end group
4866 @end smallexample
4867
4868 @node Input Section Common
4869 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4870 @cindex common symbol placement
4871 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4872 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4873 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4874 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4875 named @samp{COMMON}.
4876
4877 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4878 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4879 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4880 input files are placed in another section.
4881
4882 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4883 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4884 @smallexample
4885 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4886 @end smallexample
4887
4888 @cindex scommon section
4889 @cindex small common symbols
4890 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4891 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4892 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4893 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4894 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4895 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4896 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4897 locations.
4898
4899 @cindex [COMMON]
4900 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4901 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4902 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4903
4904 @node Input Section Keep
4905 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4906 @cindex KEEP
4907 @cindex garbage collection
4908 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4909 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4910 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4911 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4912 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4913
4914 @node Input Section Example
4915 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4916 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4917 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4918 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4919 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4920 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4921 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4922 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4923 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4924 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4925
4926 @smallexample
4927 @group
4928 SECTIONS @{
4929 outputa 0x10000 :
4930 @{
4931 all.o
4932 foo.o (.input1)
4933 @}
4934 @end group
4935 @group
4936 outputb :
4937 @{
4938 foo.o (.input2)
4939 foo1.o (.input1)
4940 @}
4941 @end group
4942 @group
4943 outputc :
4944 @{
4945 *(.input1)
4946 *(.input2)
4947 @}
4948 @}
4949 @end group
4950 @end smallexample
4951
4952 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4953 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4954 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4955 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4956 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4957 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4958 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4959
4960 @node Output Section Data
4961 @subsection Output Section Data
4962 @cindex data
4963 @cindex section data
4964 @cindex output section data
4965 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4966 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4967 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4968 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4969 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4970 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4971 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4972 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4973 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4974 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4975 counter.
4976
4977 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4978 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4979 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4980 stored.
4981
4982 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4983 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4984 @smallexample
4985 BYTE(1)
4986 LONG(addr)
4987 @end smallexample
4988
4989 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4990 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4991 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4992 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4993 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4994
4995 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4996 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4997 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4998 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4999 endianness of the first input object file.
5000
5001 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
5002 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
5003 @smallexample
5004 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
5005 @end smallexample
5006 whereas this will work:
5007 @smallexample
5008 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
5009 @end smallexample
5010
5011 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
5012 @cindex holes, filling
5013 @cindex unspecified memory
5014 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
5015 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
5016 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
5017 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
5018 with the value of the expression, repeated as
5019 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
5020 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
5021 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
5022 different parts of an output section.
5023
5024 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
5025 value @samp{0x90}:
5026 @smallexample
5027 FILL(0x90909090)
5028 @end smallexample
5029
5030 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
5031 section attribute, but it only affects the
5032 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5033 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
5034 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
5035 expression.
5036
5037 @node Output Section Keywords
5038 @subsection Output Section Keywords
5039 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5040 commands.
5041
5042 @table @code
5043 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5044 @cindex input filename symbols
5045 @cindex filename symbols
5046 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5047 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5048 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5049 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5050 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5051
5052 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5053 normally used for any other object file format.
5054
5055 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5056 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5057 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
5058 @item CONSTRUCTORS
5059 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5060 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5061 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5062 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5063 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5064 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5065 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5066 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5067 ignored for other object file formats.
5068
5069 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
5070 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5071 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5072 the start and end of the global destructors. The
5073 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5074 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5075 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5076 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5077 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5078 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5079 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5080 @code{exit}.
5081
5082 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5083 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5084 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5085 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5086 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5087 runtime code expects to see.
5088
5089 @smallexample
5090 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5091 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5092 *(.ctors)
5093 LONG(0)
5094 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5095 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5096 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5097 *(.dtors)
5098 LONG(0)
5099 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5100 @end smallexample
5101
5102 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5103 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5104 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5105 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
5106 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5107 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5108 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
5109 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
5110
5111 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5112 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5113 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5114 scripts.
5115
5116 @end table
5117
5118 @node Output Section Discarding
5119 @subsection Output Section Discarding
5120 @cindex discarding sections
5121 @cindex sections, discarding
5122 @cindex removing sections
5123 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5124 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5125 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
5126 @smallexample
5127 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
5128 @end smallexample
5129 @noindent
5130 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
5131 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5132 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
5133 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5134 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5135 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5136 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5137 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5138 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
5139
5140 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
5141 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5142 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
5143 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5144 section is discarded.
5145
5146 @cindex /DISCARD/
5147 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5148 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5149 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5150
5151 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5152 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5153 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5154 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5155
5156 @node Output Section Attributes
5157 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5158 @cindex output section attributes
5159 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5160 like this:
5161
5162 @smallexample
5163 @group
5164 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5165 [AT(@var{lma})]
5166 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5167 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5168 [@var{constraint}]
5169 @{
5170 @var{output-section-command}
5171 @var{output-section-command}
5172 @dots{}
5173 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5174 @end group
5175 @end smallexample
5176
5177 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5178 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5179 remaining section attributes.
5180
5181 @menu
5182 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5183 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5184 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5185 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5186 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5187 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5188 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5189 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5190 @end menu
5191
5192 @node Output Section Type
5193 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5194 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5195 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5196
5197 @table @code
5198 @item NOLOAD
5199 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5200 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5201 @item DSECT
5202 @itemx COPY
5203 @itemx INFO
5204 @itemx OVERLAY
5205 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5206 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5207 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5208 section when the program is run.
5209 @end table
5210
5211 @kindex NOLOAD
5212 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5213 @cindex loading, preventing
5214 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5215 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5216 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5217 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5218 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5219 @smallexample
5220 @group
5221 SECTIONS @{
5222 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5223 @dots{}
5224 @}
5225 @end group
5226 @end smallexample
5227
5228 @node Output Section LMA
5229 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5230 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5231 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5232 @cindex load address
5233 @cindex section load address
5234 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5235 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5236 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5237 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5238 address is optional.
5239
5240 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5241 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5242 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5243 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5244 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5245
5246 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5247 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5248 load address:
5249
5250 @itemize @bullet
5251 @item
5252 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5253 the LMA address as well.
5254
5255 @item
5256 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5257
5258 @item
5259 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5260 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5261 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5262 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5263 the last section in the located region.
5264
5265 @item
5266 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5267 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5268
5269 @item
5270 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5271 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5272 @end itemize
5273
5274 @cindex ROM initialized data
5275 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5276 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5277 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5278 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5279 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5280 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5281 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5282 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5283 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5284
5285 @smallexample
5286 @group
5287 SECTIONS
5288 @{
5289 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5290 .mdata 0x2000 :
5291 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5292 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5293 .bss 0x3000 :
5294 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5295 @}
5296 @end group
5297 @end smallexample
5298
5299 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5300 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5301 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5302 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5303 script.
5304
5305 @smallexample
5306 @group
5307 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5308 char *src = &_etext;
5309 char *dst = &_data;
5310
5311 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5312 while (dst < &_edata)
5313 *dst++ = *src++;
5314
5315 /* Zero bss. */
5316 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5317 *dst = 0;
5318 @end group
5319 @end smallexample
5320
5321 @node Forced Output Alignment
5322 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5323 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5324 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5325 @cindex output section alignment
5326 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5327 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5328 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5329
5330 @node Forced Input Alignment
5331 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5332 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5333 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5334 @cindex input section alignment
5335 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5336 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5337 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5338
5339 @node Output Section Constraint
5340 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5341 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5342 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5343 @cindex constraints on output sections
5344 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5345 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5346 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5347 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5348
5349 @node Output Section Region
5350 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5351 @kindex >@var{region}
5352 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5353 @cindex memory regions and sections
5354 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5355 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5356
5357 Here is a simple example:
5358 @smallexample
5359 @group
5360 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5361 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5362 @end group
5363 @end smallexample
5364
5365 @node Output Section Phdr
5366 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5367 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5368 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5369 @cindex program headers and sections
5370 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5371 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5372 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5373 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5374 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5375 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5376
5377 Here is a simple example:
5378 @smallexample
5379 @group
5380 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5381 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5382 @end group
5383 @end smallexample
5384
5385 @node Output Section Fill
5386 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5387 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5388 @cindex section fill pattern
5389 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5390 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5391 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5392 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5393 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5394 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5395 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5396 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5397 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5398 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5399 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5400 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5401 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5402
5403 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5404 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5405
5406 Here is a simple example:
5407 @smallexample
5408 @group
5409 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5410 @end group
5411 @end smallexample
5412
5413 @node Overlay Description
5414 @subsection Overlay Description
5415 @kindex OVERLAY
5416 @cindex overlays
5417 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5418 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5419 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5420 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5421 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5422 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5423 than another.
5424
5425 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5426 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5427 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5428 command is as follows:
5429 @smallexample
5430 @group
5431 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5432 @{
5433 @var{secname1}
5434 @{
5435 @var{output-section-command}
5436 @var{output-section-command}
5437 @dots{}
5438 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5439 @var{secname2}
5440 @{
5441 @var{output-section-command}
5442 @var{output-section-command}
5443 @dots{}
5444 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5445 @dots{}
5446 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5447 @end group
5448 @end smallexample
5449
5450 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5451 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5452 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5453 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5454 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5455 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5456
5457 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5458 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5459
5460 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5461 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5462 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5463 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5464 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5465 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5466
5467 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5468 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5469 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5470 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5471 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5472
5473 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5474 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5475 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5476 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5477 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5478 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5479 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5480
5481 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5482 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5483
5484 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5485 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5486 @smallexample
5487 @group
5488 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5489 @{
5490 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5491 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5492 @}
5493 @end group
5494 @end smallexample
5495 @noindent
5496 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5497 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5498 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5499 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5500 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5501 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5502
5503 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5504 like the following.
5505
5506 @smallexample
5507 @group
5508 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5509 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5510 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5511 @end group
5512 @end smallexample
5513
5514 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5515 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5516 example could have been written identically as follows.
5517
5518 @smallexample
5519 @group
5520 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5521 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5522 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5523 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5524 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5525 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5526 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5527 @end group
5528 @end smallexample
5529
5530 @node MEMORY
5531 @section MEMORY Command
5532 @kindex MEMORY
5533 @cindex memory regions
5534 @cindex regions of memory
5535 @cindex allocating memory
5536 @cindex discontinuous memory
5537 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5538 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5539
5540 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5541 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5542 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5543 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5544 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5545 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5546 around to fit into the available regions.
5547
5548 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5549 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5550 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5551 @code{MEMORY} is:
5552 @smallexample
5553 @group
5554 MEMORY
5555 @{
5556 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5557 @dots{}
5558 @}
5559 @end group
5560 @end smallexample
5561
5562 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5563 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5564 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5565 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5566 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5567 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5568 command.
5569
5570 @cindex memory region attributes
5571 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5572 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5573 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5574 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5575 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5576 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5577 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5578
5579 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5580 @table @samp
5581 @item R
5582 Read-only section
5583 @item W
5584 Read/write section
5585 @item X
5586 Executable section
5587 @item A
5588 Allocatable section
5589 @item I
5590 Initialized section
5591 @item L
5592 Same as @samp{I}
5593 @item !
5594 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5595 @end table
5596
5597 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5598 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5599 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5600 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5601 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5602 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5603 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5604 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5605
5606 @kindex ORIGIN =
5607 @kindex o =
5608 @kindex org =
5609 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5610 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5611 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5612 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5613 @code{ORG}).
5614
5615 @kindex LENGTH =
5616 @kindex len =
5617 @kindex l =
5618 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5619 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5620 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5621 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5622
5623 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5624 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5625 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5626 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5627 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5628 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5629 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5630 region.
5631
5632 @smallexample
5633 @group
5634 MEMORY
5635 @{
5636 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5637 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5638 @}
5639 @end group
5640 @end smallexample
5641
5642 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5643 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5644 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5645 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5646 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5647 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5648 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5649 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5650 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5651
5652 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5653 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5654 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5655
5656 @smallexample
5657 @group
5658 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5659 @end group
5660 @end smallexample
5661
5662 @node PHDRS
5663 @section PHDRS Command
5664 @kindex PHDRS
5665 @cindex program headers
5666 @cindex ELF program headers
5667 @cindex program segments
5668 @cindex segments, ELF
5669 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5670 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5671 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5672 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5673
5674 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5675 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5676 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5677 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5678 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5679
5680 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5681 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5682 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5683 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5684 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5685
5686 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5687 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5688 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5689
5690 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5691 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5692
5693 @smallexample
5694 @group
5695 PHDRS
5696 @{
5697 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5698 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5699 @}
5700 @end group
5701 @end smallexample
5702
5703 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5704 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5705 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5706 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5707 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5708 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5709
5710 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5711 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5712 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5713 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5714 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5715 Section Phdr}.
5716
5717 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5718 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5719 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5720 contain the section.
5721
5722 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5723 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5724 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5725 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5726 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5727 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5728 segment at all.
5729
5730 @kindex FILEHDR
5731 @kindex PHDRS
5732 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5733 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5734 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5735 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5736 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5737 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5738 these keywords.
5739
5740 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5741 value of the keyword.
5742
5743 @table @asis
5744 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5745 Indicates an unused program header.
5746
5747 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5748 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5749 the file.
5750
5751 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5752 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5753
5754 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5755 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5756 found.
5757
5758 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5759 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5760
5761 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5762 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5763 ABI.
5764
5765 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5766 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5767
5768 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5769 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5770
5771 @item @var{expression}
5772 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5773 be used for types not defined above.
5774 @end table
5775
5776 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5777 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5778 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5779 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5780 output section attribute.
5781
5782 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5783 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5784 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5785 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5786 header.
5787
5788 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5789 headers used on a native ELF system.
5790
5791 @example
5792 @group
5793 PHDRS
5794 @{
5795 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5796 interp PT_INTERP ;
5797 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5798 data PT_LOAD ;
5799 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5800 @}
5801
5802 SECTIONS
5803 @{
5804 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5805 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5806 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5807 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5808 @dots{}
5809 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5810 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5811 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5812 @dots{}
5813 @}
5814 @end group
5815 @end example
5816
5817 @node VERSION
5818 @section VERSION Command
5819 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5820 @cindex symbol versions
5821 @cindex version script
5822 @cindex versions of symbols
5823 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5824 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5825 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5826 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5827 shared library.
5828
5829 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5830 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5831 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5832
5833 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5834 @smallexample
5835 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5836 @end smallexample
5837
5838 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5839 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5840 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5841 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5842 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5843 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5844 library.
5845
5846 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5847 examples.
5848
5849 @smallexample
5850 VERS_1.1 @{
5851 global:
5852 foo1;
5853 local:
5854 old*;
5855 original*;
5856 new*;
5857 @};
5858
5859 VERS_1.2 @{
5860 foo2;
5861 @} VERS_1.1;
5862
5863 VERS_2.0 @{
5864 bar1; bar2;
5865 extern "C++" @{
5866 ns::*;
5867 "f(int, double)";
5868 @};
5869 @} VERS_1.2;
5870 @end smallexample
5871
5872 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5873 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5874 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5875 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5876 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5877 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5878 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5879 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5880 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5881 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5882
5883 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5884 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5885 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5886
5887 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5888 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5889 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5890
5891 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5892 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5893 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5894 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5895 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5896 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5897 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5898 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5899 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5900
5901 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5902 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5903 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5904 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5905
5906 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5907 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5908 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5909 won't.
5910
5911 @smallexample
5912 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5913 @end smallexample
5914
5915 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5916 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5917 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5918 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5919 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5920 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5921 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5922 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5923 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5924 search for each symbol reference.
5925
5926 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5927 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5928 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5929 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5930 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5931 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5932 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5933 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5934 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5935
5936 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5937 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5938 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5939 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5940 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5941 @smallexample
5942 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5943 @end smallexample
5944 @noindent
5945 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5946 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5947 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5948 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5949 takes precedence over a version script.
5950
5951 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5952 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5953 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5954 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5955 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5956
5957 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5958 source file. Here is an example:
5959
5960 @smallexample
5961 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5962 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5963 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5964 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5965 @end smallexample
5966
5967 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5968 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5969 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5970 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5971
5972 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5973 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5974 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5975 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5976 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5977 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5978
5979 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5980 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5981 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5982 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5983
5984 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5985
5986 @smallexample
5987 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5988 @end smallexample
5989
5990 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5991 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5992 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5993 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5994 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5995
5996 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5997 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5998 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5999 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
6000 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
6001 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
6002 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
6003 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
6004 expect when you upgrade.
6005
6006 @node Expressions
6007 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
6008 @cindex expressions
6009 @cindex arithmetic
6010 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
6011 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
6012 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
6013 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
6014
6015 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
6016
6017 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
6018 expressions.
6019
6020 @menu
6021 * Constants:: Constants
6022 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
6023 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
6024 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
6025 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6026 * Operators:: Operators
6027 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
6028 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6029 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6030 @end menu
6031
6032 @node Constants
6033 @subsection Constants
6034 @cindex integer notation
6035 @cindex constants in linker scripts
6036 All constants are integers.
6037
6038 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6039 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
6040 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
6041 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
6042 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6043 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
6044
6045 @cindex scaled integers
6046 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
6047 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
6048 @cindex suffixes for integers
6049 @cindex integer suffixes
6050 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6051 constant by
6052 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6053 @ifnottex
6054 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6055 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6056 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6057 @end ifnottex
6058 @tex
6059 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6060 @end tex
6061 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6062 respectively. For example, the following
6063 all refer to the same quantity:
6064
6065 @smallexample
6066 _fourk_1 = 4K;
6067 _fourk_2 = 4096;
6068 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
6069 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
6070 @end smallexample
6071
6072 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6073 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6074
6075 @node Symbolic Constants
6076 @subsection Symbolic Constants
6077 @cindex symbolic constants
6078 @kindex CONSTANT
6079 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
6080 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6081
6082 @table @code
6083 @item MAXPAGESIZE
6084 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6085 The target's maximum page size.
6086
6087 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
6088 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6089 The target's default page size.
6090 @end table
6091
6092 So for example:
6093
6094 @smallexample
6095 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
6096 @end smallexample
6097
6098 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6099 supported by the target.
6100
6101 @node Symbols
6102 @subsection Symbol Names
6103 @cindex symbol names
6104 @cindex names
6105 @cindex quoted symbol names
6106 @kindex "
6107 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6108 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6109 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6110 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6111 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6112 @smallexample
6113 "SECTION" = 9;
6114 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
6115 @end smallexample
6116
6117 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6118 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6119 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6120
6121 @node Orphan Sections
6122 @subsection Orphan Sections
6123 @cindex orphan
6124 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6125 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6126 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
6127 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6128 in which to place the orphaned input section.
6129
6130 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6131 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6132 placed at the end of that output section.
6133
6134 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6135 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6136 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6137 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6138 one new output section.
6139
6140 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6141 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
6142 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6143 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6144 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6145 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6146 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6147
6148 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6149 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6150 output sections an orphan is placed in.
6151
6152 @node Location Counter
6153 @subsection The Location Counter
6154 @kindex .
6155 @cindex dot
6156 @cindex location counter
6157 @cindex current output location
6158 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6159 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6160 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6161 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6162 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6163
6164 @cindex holes
6165 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6166 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6167 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6168 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6169 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6170
6171 @smallexample
6172 SECTIONS
6173 @{
6174 output :
6175 @{
6176 file1(.text)
6177 . = . + 1000;
6178 file2(.text)
6179 . += 1000;
6180 file3(.text)
6181 @} = 0x12345678;
6182 @}
6183 @end smallexample
6184 @noindent
6185 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6186 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6187 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6188 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6189 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6190 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6191
6192 @cindex dot inside sections
6193 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6194 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6195 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6196 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6197 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6198 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6199
6200 @smallexample
6201 SECTIONS
6202 @{
6203 . = 0x100
6204 .text: @{
6205 *(.text)
6206 . = 0x200
6207 @}
6208 . = 0x500
6209 .data: @{
6210 *(.data)
6211 . += 0x600
6212 @}
6213 @}
6214 @end smallexample
6215
6216 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6217 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6218 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6219 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6220 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6221 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6222 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6223 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6224
6225 @cindex dot outside sections
6226 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6227 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6228 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6229
6230 @smallexample
6231 SECTIONS
6232 @{
6233 start_of_text = . ;
6234 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6235 end_of_text = . ;
6236
6237 start_of_data = . ;
6238 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6239 end_of_data = . ;
6240 @}
6241 @end smallexample
6242
6243 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6244 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6245 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6246 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6247 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6248 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6249 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6250 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6251 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6252 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6253 as follows:
6254
6255 @smallexample
6256 SECTIONS
6257 @{
6258 start_of_text = . ;
6259 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6260 end_of_text = . ;
6261
6262 start_of_data = . ;
6263 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6264 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6265 end_of_data = . ;
6266 @}
6267 @end smallexample
6268
6269 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6270 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6271 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6272 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6273 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6274 section. So you could write:
6275
6276 @smallexample
6277 SECTIONS
6278 @{
6279 start_of_text = . ;
6280 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6281 end_of_text = . ;
6282
6283 . = . ;
6284 start_of_data = . ;
6285 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6286 end_of_data = . ;
6287 @}
6288 @end smallexample
6289
6290 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6291 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6292
6293 @need 2000
6294 @node Operators
6295 @subsection Operators
6296 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6297 @cindex arithmetic operators
6298 @cindex precedence in expressions
6299 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6300 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6301 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6302 @ifnottex
6303 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6304 @smallexample
6305 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6306 (highest)
6307 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6308 2 left * / %
6309 3 left + -
6310 4 left >> <<
6311 5 left == != > < <= >=
6312 6 left &
6313 7 left |
6314 8 left &&
6315 9 left ||
6316 10 right ? :
6317 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6318 (lowest)
6319 @end smallexample
6320 Notes:
6321 (1) Prefix operators
6322 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6323 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6324 @end ifnottex
6325 @tex
6326 \vskip \baselineskip
6327 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6328 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6329 \hrule
6330 \halign
6331 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6332 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6333 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6334 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6335 \noalign{\hrule}
6336 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6337 &highest&&&&&\cr
6338 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6339 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6340 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6341 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6342 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6343 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6344 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6345 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6346 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6347 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6348 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6349 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6350 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6351 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6352 \hrule}
6353 @end tex
6354 @iftex
6355 {
6356 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6357 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6358 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6359 }
6360 @end iftex
6361 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6362
6363 @node Evaluation
6364 @subsection Evaluation
6365 @cindex lazy evaluation
6366 @cindex expression evaluation order
6367 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6368 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6369
6370 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6371 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6372 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6373 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6374
6375 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6376 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6377 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6378 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6379
6380 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6381 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6382 allocation.
6383
6384 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6385 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6386
6387 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6388 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6389 following
6390 @smallexample
6391 @group
6392 SECTIONS
6393 @{
6394 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6395 @{ *(.text) @}
6396 @}
6397 @end group
6398 @end smallexample
6399 @noindent
6400 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6401 address}.
6402
6403 @node Expression Section
6404 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6405 @cindex expression sections
6406 @cindex absolute expressions
6407 @cindex relative expressions
6408 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6409 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6410 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6411 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6412 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6413 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6414 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6415 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6416 operations.
6417
6418 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6419 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6420 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6421 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6422 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6423 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6424 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6425 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6426 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6427 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6428 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6429 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6430 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6431 everywhere.
6432
6433 In the following simple example,
6434
6435 @smallexample
6436 @group
6437 SECTIONS
6438 @{
6439 . = 0x100;
6440 __executable_start = 0x100;
6441 .data :
6442 @{
6443 . = 0x10;
6444 __data_start = 0x10;
6445 *(.data)
6446 @}
6447 @dots{}
6448 @}
6449 @end group
6450 @end smallexample
6451
6452 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6453 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6454 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6455 section in the second two assignments.
6456
6457 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6458 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6459
6460 @itemize @bullet
6461 @item
6462 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6463 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6464 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6465 @item
6466 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6467 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6468 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6469 @item
6470 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6471 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6472 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6473 before applying the operator.
6474 @end itemize
6475
6476 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6477
6478 @itemize @bullet
6479 @item
6480 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6481 @item
6482 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6483 @item
6484 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6485 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6486 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6487 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6488 but an absolute address otherwise.
6489 @item
6490 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6491 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6492 section as the relative operand(s).
6493 @item
6494 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6495 conversions) is an absolute address.
6496 @end itemize
6497
6498 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6499 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6500 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6501 section @samp{.data}:
6502 @smallexample
6503 SECTIONS
6504 @{
6505 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6506 @}
6507 @end smallexample
6508 @noindent
6509 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6510 @samp{.data} section.
6511
6512 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6513 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6514
6515 @node Builtin Functions
6516 @subsection Builtin Functions
6517 @cindex functions in expressions
6518 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6519 use in linker script expressions.
6520
6521 @table @code
6522 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6523 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6524 @cindex expression, absolute
6525 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6526 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6527 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6528 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6529
6530 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6531 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6532 @cindex section address in expression
6533 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6534 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6535 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6536 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6537 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6538 the other two will be absolute:
6539 @smallexample
6540 @group
6541 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6542 .output1 :
6543 @{
6544 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6545 @dots{}
6546 @}
6547 .output :
6548 @{
6549 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6550 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6551 @}
6552 @dots{} @}
6553 @end group
6554 @end smallexample
6555
6556 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6557 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6558 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6559 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6560 @cindex round up location counter
6561 @cindex align location counter
6562 @cindex round up expression
6563 @cindex align expression
6564 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6565 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6566 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6567 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6568 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6569 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6570
6571 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6572 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6573 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6574 input sections:
6575 @smallexample
6576 @group
6577 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6578 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6579 *(.data)
6580 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6581 @}
6582 @dots{} @}
6583 @end group
6584 @end smallexample
6585 @noindent
6586 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6587 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6588 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6589 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6590
6591 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6592
6593 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6594 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6595 @cindex section alignment
6596 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6597 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6598 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6599 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6600 value in that section.
6601 @smallexample
6602 @group
6603 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6604 .output @{
6605 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6606 @dots{}
6607 @}
6608 @dots{} @}
6609 @end group
6610 @end smallexample
6611
6612 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6613 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6614 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6615 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6616 section.
6617
6618 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6619 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6620 This is equivalent to either
6621 @smallexample
6622 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6623 @end smallexample
6624 or
6625 @smallexample
6626 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6627 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6628 @end smallexample
6629 @noindent
6630 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6631 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6632 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6633 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6634 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6635 bytes in the on-disk file.
6636
6637 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6638 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6639 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6640 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6641 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6642 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6643 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6644
6645 @noindent
6646 Example:
6647 @smallexample
6648 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6649 @end smallexample
6650
6651 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6652 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6653 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6654 evaluation purposes.
6655
6656 @smallexample
6657 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6658 @end smallexample
6659
6660 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6661 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6662 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6663 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6664 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6665 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6666 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6667 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6668 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6669 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6670 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6671 section alignment.
6672
6673 @smallexample
6674 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6675 @end smallexample
6676
6677 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6678 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6679 @cindex symbol defaults
6680 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6681 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6682 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6683 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6684 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6685 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6686 existed, its value is preserved:
6687
6688 @smallexample
6689 @group
6690 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6691 .text : @{
6692 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6693 @dots{}
6694 @}
6695 @dots{}
6696 @}
6697 @end group
6698 @end smallexample
6699
6700 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6701 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6702 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6703
6704 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6705 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6706 @cindex section load address in expression
6707 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6708 Section LMA}).
6709
6710 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6711 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6712 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6713 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6714
6715 @kindex MAX
6716 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6717 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6718
6719 @kindex MIN
6720 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6721 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6722
6723 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6724 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6725 @cindex unallocated address, next
6726 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6727 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6728 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6729 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6730
6731 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6732 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6733 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6734
6735 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6736 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6737 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6738 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6739 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6740 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6741 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6742 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6743 name.
6744
6745 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6746 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6747 @cindex section size
6748 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6749 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6750 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6751 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6752 @smallexample
6753 @group
6754 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6755 .output @{
6756 .start = . ;
6757 @dots{}
6758 .end = . ;
6759 @}
6760 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6761 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6762 @dots{} @}
6763 @end group
6764 @end smallexample
6765
6766 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6767 @itemx sizeof_headers
6768 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6769 @cindex header size
6770 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6771 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6772 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6773 choose, to facilitate paging.
6774
6775 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6776 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6777 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6778 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6779 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6780 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6781 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6782 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6783 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6784 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6785 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6786 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6787 @end table
6788
6789 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6790 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6791 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6792 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6793 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6794 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6795 linker will report an error.
6796
6797 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6798
6799 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6800 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6801 commands.
6802
6803 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6804 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6805 read. This can affect archive searching.
6806
6807 @ifset GENERIC
6808 @node Machine Dependent
6809 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6810
6811 @cindex machine dependencies
6812 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6813 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6814 functionality are not listed.
6815
6816 @menu
6817 @ifset H8300
6818 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6819 @end ifset
6820 @ifset M68HC11
6821 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6822 @end ifset
6823 @ifset ARM
6824 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6825 @end ifset
6826 @ifset HPPA
6827 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6828 @end ifset
6829 @ifset M68K
6830 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6831 @end ifset
6832 @ifset MIPS
6833 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6834 @end ifset
6835 @ifset MMIX
6836 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6837 @end ifset
6838 @ifset MSP430
6839 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6840 @end ifset
6841 @ifset NDS32
6842 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6843 @end ifset
6844 @ifset NIOSII
6845 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6846 @end ifset
6847 @ifset POWERPC
6848 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6849 @end ifset
6850 @ifset POWERPC64
6851 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6852 @end ifset
6853 @ifset S/390
6854 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6855 @end ifset
6856 @ifset SPU
6857 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6858 @end ifset
6859 @ifset TICOFF
6860 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6861 @end ifset
6862 @ifset WIN32
6863 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6864 @end ifset
6865 @ifset XTENSA
6866 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6867 @end ifset
6868 @end menu
6869 @end ifset
6870
6871 @ifset H8300
6872 @ifclear GENERIC
6873 @raisesections
6874 @end ifclear
6875
6876 @node H8/300
6877 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6878
6879 @cindex H8/300 support
6880 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6881 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6882
6883 @table @emph
6884 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6885 @item relaxing address modes
6886 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6887 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6888 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6889 respectively.
6890
6891 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6892 @item synthesizing instructions
6893 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6894 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6895 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6896 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6897 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6898 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6899 top page of memory).
6900
6901 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6902 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6903 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6904 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6905 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6906 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6907 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6908
6909 @item bit manipulation instructions
6910 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6911 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6912 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6913 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6914 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6915 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6916 the top page of memory).
6917
6918 @item system control instructions
6919 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6920 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6921 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6922 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6923 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6924 the top page of memory).
6925 @end table
6926
6927 @ifclear GENERIC
6928 @lowersections
6929 @end ifclear
6930 @end ifset
6931
6932 @ifclear GENERIC
6933 @ifset Renesas
6934 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6935 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6936 @node Renesas
6937 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6938
6939 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6940 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6941 options are required for these chips.
6942 @end ifset
6943 @end ifclear
6944
6945 @ifset ARM
6946 @ifclear GENERIC
6947 @raisesections
6948 @end ifclear
6949
6950 @ifset M68HC11
6951 @ifclear GENERIC
6952 @raisesections
6953 @end ifclear
6954
6955 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6956 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6957
6958 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6959
6960 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6961
6962 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6963 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6964
6965 @table @emph
6966 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6967 @item relaxing address modes
6968 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6969 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6970 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6971 respectively.
6972
6973 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6974 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6975 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6976
6977 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6978 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6979 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6980 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6981 @code{bset} instructions.
6982
6983 @end table
6984
6985 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6986
6987 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6988 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6989 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6990 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6991 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6992 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6993 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6994 point to the function trampoline.
6995
6996 @ifclear GENERIC
6997 @lowersections
6998 @end ifclear
6999 @end ifset
7000
7001 @node ARM
7002 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
7003
7004 @cindex ARM interworking support
7005 @kindex --support-old-code
7006 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
7007 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
7008 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
7009 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
7010 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
7011 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
7012 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
7013 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
7014 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
7015 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
7016
7017 @cindex thumb entry point
7018 @cindex entry point, thumb
7019 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
7020 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
7021 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
7022 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
7023 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
7024 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7025
7026 @cindex PE import table prefixing
7027 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7028 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7029 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
7030 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
7031 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7032
7033 @cindex BE8
7034 @kindex --be8
7035 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
7036 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7037 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7038 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7039 little-endian code.
7040
7041 @cindex TARGET1
7042 @kindex --target1-rel
7043 @kindex --target1-abs
7044 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7045 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7046 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7047 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7048
7049 @cindex TARGET2
7050 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
7051 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7052 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7053 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7054 @table @samp
7055 @item rel
7056 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7057 @item abs
7058 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
7059 @item got-rel
7060 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7061 @end table
7062
7063 @cindex FIX_V4BX
7064 @kindex --fix-v4bx
7065 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7066 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7067 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7068 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7069
7070 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7071 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7072 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7073
7074 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7075 relocations are ignored.
7076
7077 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7078 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7079 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7080 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7081
7082 @smallexample
7083 TST rM, #1
7084 MOVEQ PC, rM
7085 BX Rn
7086 @end smallexample
7087
7088 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7089 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
7090 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
7091
7092 @cindex USE_BLX
7093 @kindex --use-blx
7094 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7095 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7096 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7097 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7098 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7099
7100 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7101 specify it if you are using that target.
7102
7103 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7104 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7105 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7106 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7107 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7108 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7109 the support code can read the intended values.
7110
7111 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7112 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7113 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7114 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7115 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7116 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7117
7118 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7119 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7120 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7121 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7122 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7123 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7124
7125 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7126 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7127 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7128 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7129 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7130 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7131 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7132
7133 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7134 @kindex --fix-arm1176
7135 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
7136 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7137 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7138 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
7139 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7140
7141 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
7142 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
7143 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7144
7145 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7146 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7147
7148 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7149 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7150 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7151 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7152 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7153 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7154 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7155 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7156
7157 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7158 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7159
7160 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7161 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7162 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7163 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7164 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7165
7166 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7167 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7168 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7169 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7170 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7171 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7172
7173 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7174 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7175
7176 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7177 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7178 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7179 occurs.
7180
7181 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7182 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7183 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7184 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7185 occurs.
7186
7187 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7188 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7189 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7190 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7191 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7192 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7193 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7194 not be diagnosed.
7195
7196 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7197 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7198 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7199 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7200 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7201 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7202 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7203
7204 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7205 @kindex --pic-veneer
7206 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7207 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7208 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7209 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7210
7211 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7212 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7213 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7214 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7215 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7216 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7217 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7218 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7219 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7220 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7221 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7222 where they should be placed.
7223
7224 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7225 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7226 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7227 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7228 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7229 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7230 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7231 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7232 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7233 from the input sections.
7234
7235 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7236 @samp{N = +1}.
7237
7238 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7239 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7240 otherwise.
7241
7242 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7243 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7244 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7245 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7246
7247 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7248
7249 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7250 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7251 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7252 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7253
7254 Please contact ARM for further details.
7255
7256 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7257 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7258 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7259 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7260
7261 @kindex --long-plt
7262 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7263 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7264 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7265 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7266
7267 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7268 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7269 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7270 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7271
7272 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7273 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7274 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7275 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7276 veneers in memory.
7277
7278 @kindex --cmse-implib
7279 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7280 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7281 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7282 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7283 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7284
7285 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7286 @cindex Input import library
7287 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7288 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7289 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7290 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7291 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7292 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7293 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7294 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7295 specified.
7296
7297 @ifclear GENERIC
7298 @lowersections
7299 @end ifclear
7300 @end ifset
7301
7302 @ifset HPPA
7303 @ifclear GENERIC
7304 @raisesections
7305 @end ifclear
7306
7307 @node HPPA ELF32
7308 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7309 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7310 @kindex --multi-subspace
7311 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7312 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7313 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7314 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7315 multiple sub-spaces.
7316
7317 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7318 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7319 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7320 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7321 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7322 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7323 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7324 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7325 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7326 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7327 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7328 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7329 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7330 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7331 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7332 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7333
7334 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7335 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7336 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7337 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7338
7339 @ifclear GENERIC
7340 @lowersections
7341 @end ifclear
7342 @end ifset
7343
7344 @ifset M68K
7345 @ifclear GENERIC
7346 @raisesections
7347 @end ifclear
7348
7349 @node M68K
7350 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7351
7352 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7353 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7354 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7355 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7356 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7357 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7358 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7359 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7360 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7361 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7362 support such GOTs.
7363 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7364 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7365 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7366 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7367
7368 @ifclear GENERIC
7369 @lowersections
7370 @end ifclear
7371 @end ifset
7372
7373 @ifset MIPS
7374 @ifclear GENERIC
7375 @raisesections
7376 @end ifclear
7377
7378 @node MIPS
7379 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7380
7381 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7382 @kindex --insn32
7383 @kindex --no-insn32
7384 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7385 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7386 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7387 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7388 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7389 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7390
7391 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7392 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7393 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7394 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7395 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7396 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7397 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7398 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7399 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7400 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7401 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7402 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7403
7404 @ifclear GENERIC
7405 @lowersections
7406 @end ifclear
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @ifset MMIX
7410 @ifclear GENERIC
7411 @raisesections
7412 @end ifclear
7413
7414 @node MMIX
7415 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7416 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7417 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7418 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7419 can translate between the two formats.
7420
7421 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7422 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7423 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7424 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7425 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7426 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7427 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7428 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7429
7430 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7431 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7432 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7433 of a section.
7434
7435 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7436 are left out from an mmo file.
7437
7438 @ifclear GENERIC
7439 @lowersections
7440 @end ifclear
7441 @end ifset
7442
7443 @ifset MSP430
7444 @ifclear GENERIC
7445 @raisesections
7446 @end ifclear
7447
7448 @node MSP430
7449 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7450 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7451 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7452 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7453
7454 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7455 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7456
7457 @table @code
7458 @item @samp{.vectors}
7459 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7460
7461 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7462 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7463 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7464
7465 @item @samp{.infomem}
7466 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7467 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7468
7469 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7470 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7471 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7472
7473 @item @samp{.noinit}
7474 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7475
7476 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7477 @end table
7478
7479 @table @option
7480 @cindex MSP430 Options
7481 @kindex --code-region
7482 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7483 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7484 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7485 using this option.
7486
7487 @kindex --data-region
7488 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7489 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7490 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7491 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7492
7493 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7494 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7495 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7496 and @code{--data-region} options.
7497 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7498 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7499 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7500 @end table
7501
7502 @ifclear GENERIC
7503 @lowersections
7504 @end ifclear
7505 @end ifset
7506
7507 @ifset NDS32
7508 @ifclear GENERIC
7509 @raisesections
7510 @end ifclear
7511
7512 @node NDS32
7513 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7514 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7515 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7516 relaxes objects according to these options.
7517
7518 @table @code
7519 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7520 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7521
7522 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7523 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7524
7525 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7526 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7527
7528 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7529 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7530
7531 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7532 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7533
7534 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7535 Update the existing EX9 table.
7536
7537 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7538 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7539
7540 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7541 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7542
7543 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7544 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7545
7546 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7547 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7548 @end table
7549
7550 @ifclear GENERIC
7551 @lowersections
7552 @end ifclear
7553 @end ifset
7554
7555 @ifset NIOSII
7556 @ifclear GENERIC
7557 @raisesections
7558 @end ifclear
7559
7560 @node Nios II
7561 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7562 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7563 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7564
7565 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7566 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7567 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7568 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7569 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7570 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7571 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7572 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7573 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7574 larger than 256MB.
7575
7576 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7577 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7578 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7579 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7580 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7581 register as a temporary.
7582
7583 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7584 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7585 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7586
7587 @ifclear GENERIC
7588 @lowersections
7589 @end ifclear
7590 @end ifset
7591
7592 @ifset POWERPC
7593 @ifclear GENERIC
7594 @raisesections
7595 @end ifclear
7596
7597 @node PowerPC ELF32
7598 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7599 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7600 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7601 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7602 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7603 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7604 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7605 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7606 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7607 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7608 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7609 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7610 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7611
7612 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7613 @table @option
7614 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7615 @kindex --bss-plt
7616 @item --bss-plt
7617 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7618 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7619 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7620 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7621 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7622 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7623 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7624 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7625
7626 @kindex --secure-plt
7627 @item --secure-plt
7628 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7629 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7630 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7631 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7632 style BSS PLT.
7633
7634 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7635 @kindex --sdata-got
7636 @item --sdata-got
7637 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7638 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7639 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7640 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7641 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7642 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7643 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7644 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7645 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7646 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7647 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7648 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7649
7650 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7651 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7652 @item --emit-stub-syms
7653 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7654 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7655
7656 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7657 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7658 @item --no-tls-optimize
7659 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7660 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7661 disable the optimization.
7662 @end table
7663
7664 @ifclear GENERIC
7665 @lowersections
7666 @end ifclear
7667 @end ifset
7668
7669 @ifset POWERPC64
7670 @ifclear GENERIC
7671 @raisesections
7672 @end ifclear
7673
7674 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7675 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7676
7677 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7678 @table @option
7679 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7680 @kindex --stub-group-size
7681 @item --stub-group-size
7682 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7683 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7684 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7685 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7686 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7687 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7688 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7689 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7690 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7691 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7692 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7693 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7694 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7695 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7696
7697 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7698 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7699 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7700 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7701
7702 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7703 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7704 @item --emit-stub-syms
7705 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7706 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7707
7708 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7709 @kindex --dotsyms
7710 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7711 @item --dotsyms
7712 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7713 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7714 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7715 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7716 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7717 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7718 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7719 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7720 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7721 feature.
7722
7723 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7724 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7725 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7726 @item --save-restore-funcs
7727 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7728 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7729 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7730 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7731 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7732 link.
7733
7734 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7735 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7736 @item --no-tls-optimize
7737 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7738 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7739 disable the optimization.
7740
7741 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7742 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7743 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7744 @kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7745 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
7746 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7747 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7748 These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7749 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7750 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7751 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7752 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7753 generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7754 __tls_get_addr_opt.
7755 Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7756 much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7757 an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7758 will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7759 @option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7760 and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7761 this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7762 Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
7763 @option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
7764 register saves.
7765
7766 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7767 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7768 @item --no-opd-optimize
7769 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7770 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7771 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7772 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7773
7774 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7775 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7776 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7777 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7778 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7779 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7780 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7781
7782 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7783 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7784 @item --no-toc-optimize
7785 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7786 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7787 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7788 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7789 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7790 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7791 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7792 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7793 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7794 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7795 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7796 optimization.
7797
7798 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7799 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7800 @item --no-multi-toc
7801 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7802 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7803 where TOC
7804 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7805 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7806 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7807 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7808 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7809 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7810 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7811 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7812
7813 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7814 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7815 @item --no-toc-sort
7816 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7817 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7818 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7819 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7820 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7821 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7822 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7823 off this feature.
7824
7825 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7826 @kindex --plt-align
7827 @kindex --no-plt-align
7828 @item --plt-align
7829 @itemx --no-plt-align
7830 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7831 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7832 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7833 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7834 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7835 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7836 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7837
7838 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7839 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7840 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7841 @item --plt-static-chain
7842 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7843 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7844 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7845 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7846
7847 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7848 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7849 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7850 @item --plt-thread-safe
7851 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7852 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7853 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7854 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7855 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7856 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7857 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7858 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7859 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7860 default behaviour.
7861
7862 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7863 @kindex --plt-localentry
7864 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7865 @item --plt-localentry
7866 @itemx --no-localentry
7867 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7868 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7869 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7870 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7871 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7872 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7873 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7874 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7875 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7876 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7877 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7878 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7879 @end table
7880
7881 @ifclear GENERIC
7882 @lowersections
7883 @end ifclear
7884 @end ifset
7885
7886 @ifset S/390
7887 @ifclear GENERIC
7888 @raisesections
7889 @end ifclear
7890
7891 @node S/390 ELF
7892 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7893
7894 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7895 @table @option
7896
7897 @cindex S/390
7898 @kindex --s390-pgste
7899 @item --s390-pgste
7900 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7901 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7902 binaries marked that way.
7903 @end table
7904
7905 @ifclear GENERIC
7906 @lowersections
7907 @end ifclear
7908 @end ifset
7909
7910 @ifset SPU
7911 @ifclear GENERIC
7912 @raisesections
7913 @end ifclear
7914
7915 @node SPU ELF
7916 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7917
7918 @cindex SPU ELF options
7919 @table @option
7920
7921 @cindex SPU plugins
7922 @kindex --plugin
7923 @item --plugin
7924 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7925
7926 @cindex SPU overlays
7927 @kindex --no-overlays
7928 @item --no-overlays
7929 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7930 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7931 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7932 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7933
7934 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7935 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7936 @item --emit-stub-syms
7937 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7938 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7939
7940 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7941 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7942 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7943 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7944 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7945 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7946
7947 @cindex SPU local store size
7948 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7949 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7950 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7951 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7952 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7953
7954 @cindex SPU
7955 @kindex --stack-analysis
7956 @item --stack-analysis
7957 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7958 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7959 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7960 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7961 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7962 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7963 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7964 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7965 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7966 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7967 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7968 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7969 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7970 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7971 and calls will be given.
7972
7973 @cindex SPU
7974 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7975 @item --emit-stack-syms
7976 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7977 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7978 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7979 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7980 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7981 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7982 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7983 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7984 @end table
7985
7986 @ifclear GENERIC
7987 @lowersections
7988 @end ifclear
7989 @end ifset
7990
7991 @ifset TICOFF
7992 @ifclear GENERIC
7993 @raisesections
7994 @end ifclear
7995
7996 @node TI COFF
7997 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7998 @cindex TI COFF versions
7999 @kindex --format=@var{version}
8000 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
8001 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
8002 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
8003 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
8004 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
8005
8006 @ifclear GENERIC
8007 @lowersections
8008 @end ifclear
8009 @end ifset
8010
8011 @ifset WIN32
8012 @ifclear GENERIC
8013 @raisesections
8014 @end ifclear
8015
8016 @node WIN32
8017 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
8018
8019 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
8020 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
8021 command-line options mentioned here.
8022
8023 @table @emph
8024 @cindex import libraries
8025 @item import libraries
8026 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
8027 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
8028 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8029 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
8030 support for creating such libraries provided with the
8031 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
8032
8033 @item exporting DLL symbols
8034 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
8035 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8036
8037 @table @emph
8038 @item using auto-export functionality
8039 @cindex using auto-export functionality
8040 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
8041 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
8042
8043 @itemize
8044 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8045 @item --exclude-symbols
8046 @item --exclude-libs
8047 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
8048 @item --version-script
8049 @end itemize
8050
8051 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8052 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8053 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8054 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8055 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
8056 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
8057 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8058 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8059
8060 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
8061 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8062 if either of the following are true:
8063
8064 @itemize
8065 @item A DEF file is used.
8066 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8067 @end itemize
8068
8069 @item using a DEF file
8070 @cindex using a DEF file
8071 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8072 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8073 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8074 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
8075 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
8076
8077 @example
8078 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8079 @end example
8080
8081 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8082 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8083
8084 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8085
8086 @example
8087 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
8088
8089 EXPORTS
8090 foo
8091 bar
8092 _bar = bar
8093 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8094 var1 DATA
8095 doo = foo == foo2
8096 eoo DATA == var1
8097 @end example
8098
8099 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
8100 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8101 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8102 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8103 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
8104 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8105 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8106 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8107 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
8108
8109 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8110 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8111 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8112
8113 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8114 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
8115 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
8116 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
8117
8118 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8119 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
8120 non-default base address for the image.
8121
8122 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
8123 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8124 filename specified on the command line.
8125
8126 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8127
8128 @example
8129 EXPORTS
8130 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8131 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
8132 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
8133 @end example
8134
8135 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8136 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8137 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8138 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8139 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
8140 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8141 string in import/export table for the symbol.
8142
8143 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8144
8145 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8146 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8147 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8148 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8149 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8150
8151 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8152 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8153 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8154 @code{*_imp__foo}).
8155
8156 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8157 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8158 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8159 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8160 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8161 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8162 application will behave unexpectedly.
8163
8164 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8165 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8166 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8167 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8168 the DLL without an import library.
8169
8170 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8171 other DEF file statements
8172
8173 @cindex creating a DEF file
8174 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8175 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8176
8177 @item Using decorations
8178 @cindex Using decorations
8179 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8180 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8181 declared as:
8182
8183 @example
8184 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8185 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8186 @end example
8187
8188 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8189 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8190 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8191 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8192
8193 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8194 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8195 instead:
8196
8197 @example
8198 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8199 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8200 @end example
8201
8202 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8203 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8204 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8205 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8206 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8207 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8208 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8209 information.
8210 @end table
8211
8212 @cindex automatic data imports
8213 @item automatic data imports
8214 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8215 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8216 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8217 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8218 code to these platforms, especially for large
8219 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8220 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8221 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8222 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8223 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8224 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8225 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8226 trigger the feature's use.
8227
8228 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8229 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8230
8231 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8232 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8233
8234 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8235 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8236 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8237 below.
8238
8239 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8240 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8241 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8242 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8243 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8244 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8245 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8246 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8247 references.
8248
8249 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8250 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8251 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8252 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8253 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8254 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8255 run without error on an older system.
8256
8257 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8258 enabled as needed.
8259
8260 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8261 @item direct linking to a dll
8262 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8263 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8264 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8265 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8266 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8267 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8268 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8269 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8270 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8271 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8272
8273 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8274 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8275 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8276 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8277 select the dll instead of an import library.
8278
8279
8280 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8281 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8282
8283 @example
8284 libxxx.dll.a
8285 xxx.dll.a
8286 libxxx.a
8287 xxx.lib
8288 libxxx.lib
8289 cygxxx.dll (*)
8290 libxxx.dll
8291 xxx.dll
8292 @end example
8293
8294 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8295
8296 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8297 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8298 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8299 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8300 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8301
8302 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8303 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8304 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8305 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8306 could coexist on the same machine.
8307
8308 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8309 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8310 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8311
8312 @example
8313 bin/
8314 cygxxx.dll
8315 lib/
8316 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8317 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8318 @end example
8319
8320 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8321 done two ways:
8322
8323 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8324 @example
8325 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8326 @end example
8327
8328 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8329 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8330 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8331 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8332
8333 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8334 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8335 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8336 making the app/dll.
8337
8338 @example
8339 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8340 @end example
8341
8342 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8343
8344 @example
8345 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8346 @end example
8347
8348 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8349 perfectly legal
8350
8351 @example
8352 bin/
8353 cygxxx-5.dll
8354 lib/
8355 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8356 @end example
8357
8358 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8359 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8360 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8361
8362 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8363 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8364
8365 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8366 work with auto-imported data.
8367
8368 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8369 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8370 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8371 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8372 possible to do this without an import lib.
8373
8374 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8375 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8376 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8377 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8378
8379 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8380 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8381 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8382 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8383 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8384 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8385 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8386
8387 @item symbol aliasing
8388 @table @emph
8389 @item adding additional names
8390 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8391 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8392 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8393 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8394 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8395
8396 @example
8397 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8398
8399 EXPORTS
8400 foo
8401 _foo = foo
8402 @end example
8403
8404 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8405
8406 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8407 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8408
8409 @example
8410 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8411 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8412 @end example
8413
8414 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8415 symbols.
8416
8417 @item renaming symbols
8418 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8419 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8420 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8421 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8422 created). In the following example:
8423
8424 @example
8425 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8426
8427 EXPORTS
8428 _foo = foo
8429 @end example
8430
8431 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8432 @samp{_foo}.
8433 @end table
8434
8435 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8436 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8437 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8438 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8439 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8440 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8441 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8442 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8443 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8444 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8445 which is probably not what you wanted.
8446
8447 @cindex weak externals
8448 @item weak externals
8449 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8450 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8451 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8452 are three variants of weak externals:
8453 @itemize
8454 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8455 called lazy externals.
8456 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8457 This form is not presently implemented.
8458 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8459 implemented.
8460 @end itemize
8461 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8462 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8463 uses a default value.
8464
8465 @cindex aligned common symbols
8466 @item aligned common symbols
8467 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8468 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8469 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8470 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8471 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8472 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8473 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8474 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8475
8476 @end table
8477
8478 @ifclear GENERIC
8479 @lowersections
8480 @end ifclear
8481 @end ifset
8482
8483 @ifset XTENSA
8484 @ifclear GENERIC
8485 @raisesections
8486 @end ifclear
8487
8488 @node Xtensa
8489 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8490
8491 @cindex Xtensa processors
8492 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8493 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8494 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8495 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8496 example, with the command:
8497
8498 @smallexample
8499 SECTIONS
8500 @{
8501 .text : @{
8502 *(.literal .text)
8503 @}
8504 @}
8505 @end smallexample
8506
8507 @noindent
8508 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8509 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8510 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8511 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8512 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8513 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8514 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8515
8516 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8517 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8518 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8519 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8520 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8521 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8522 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8523 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8524 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8525 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8526 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8527 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8528
8529 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8530 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8531 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8532 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8533 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8534 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8535 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8536 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8537 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8538 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8539 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8540 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8541 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8542 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8543
8544 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8545 control the linker:
8546
8547 @cindex Xtensa options
8548 @table @option
8549 @item --size-opt
8550 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8551 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8552 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8553 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8554 preserve the correctness of the code.
8555 @end table
8556
8557 @ifclear GENERIC
8558 @lowersections
8559 @end ifclear
8560 @end ifset
8561
8562 @ifclear SingleFormat
8563 @node BFD
8564 @chapter BFD
8565
8566 @cindex back end
8567 @cindex object file management
8568 @cindex object formats available
8569 @kindex objdump -i
8570 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8571 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8572 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8573 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8574 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8575 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8576 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8577 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8578 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8579
8580 @cindex BFD requirements
8581 @cindex requirements for BFD
8582 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8583 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8584 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8585 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8586 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8587 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8588 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8589
8590 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8591 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8592 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8593 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8594
8595 @menu
8596 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8597 @end menu
8598
8599 @node BFD outline
8600 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8601 @cindex opening object files
8602 @include bfdsumm.texi
8603 @end ifclear
8604
8605 @node Reporting Bugs
8606 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8607 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8608 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8609
8610 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8611
8612 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8613 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8614 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8615 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8616 @command{ld}.
8617
8618 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8619 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8620
8621 @menu
8622 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8623 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8624 @end menu
8625
8626 @node Bug Criteria
8627 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8628 @cindex bug criteria
8629
8630 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8631
8632 @itemize @bullet
8633 @cindex fatal signal
8634 @cindex linker crash
8635 @cindex crash of linker
8636 @item
8637 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8638 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8639
8640 @cindex error on valid input
8641 @item
8642 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8643
8644 @cindex invalid input
8645 @item
8646 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8647 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8648 object files are correct.
8649
8650 @item
8651 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8652 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8653 @end itemize
8654
8655 @node Bug Reporting
8656 @section How to Report Bugs
8657 @cindex bug reports
8658 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8659
8660 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8661 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8662 recommend you contact that organization first.
8663
8664 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8665 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8666 distribution.
8667
8668 @ifset BUGURL
8669 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8670 @value{BUGURL}.
8671 @end ifset
8672
8673 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8674 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8675 fact or leave it out, state it!
8676
8677 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8678 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8679 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8680 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8681 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8682 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8683 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8684 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8685 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8686 and the most helpful.
8687
8688 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8689 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8690 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8691
8692 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8693 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8694 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8695 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8696
8697 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8698
8699 @itemize @bullet
8700 @item
8701 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8702 the @samp{--version} argument.
8703
8704 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8705 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8706
8707 @item
8708 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8709 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8710
8711 @item
8712 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8713 version number.
8714
8715 @item
8716 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8717 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8718
8719 @item
8720 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8721 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8722 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8723 sufficient.
8724
8725 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8726 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8727
8728 @item
8729 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8730 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8731 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8732 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8733 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8734 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8735 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8736 attachments are best.
8737
8738 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8739 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8740 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8741 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8742 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8743
8744 @item
8745 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8746 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8747
8748 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8749 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8750 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8751 a chance to make a mistake.
8752
8753 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8754 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8755 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8756 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8757 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8758 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8759 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8760 any conclusion from our observations.
8761
8762 @item
8763 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8764 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8765 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8766 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8767 context, not by line number.
8768
8769 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8770 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8771 @end itemize
8772
8773 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8774
8775 @itemize @bullet
8776 @item
8777 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8778
8779 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8780 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8781 changes will not affect it.
8782
8783 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8784 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8785 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8786 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8787
8788 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8789 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8790 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8791 less time, and so on.
8792
8793 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8794 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8795
8796 @item
8797 A patch for the bug.
8798
8799 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8800 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8801 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8802 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8803
8804 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8805 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8806 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8807 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8808 fixed.
8809
8810 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8811 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8812 help us to understand.
8813
8814 @item
8815 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8816
8817 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8818 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8819 @end itemize
8820
8821 @node MRI
8822 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8823 @cindex MRI compatibility
8824 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8825 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8826 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8827 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8828 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8829 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8830 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8831
8832 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8833 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8834 features to make use of them.
8835
8836 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8837 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8838
8839 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8840 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8841 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8842 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8843 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8844
8845 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8846
8847 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8848 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8849 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8850
8851 @table @code
8852 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8853 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8854 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8855 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8856 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8857 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8858 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8859 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8860 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8861 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8862 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8863
8864 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8865 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8866 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8867 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8868
8869 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8870
8871 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8872 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8873 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8874 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8875
8876 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8877 @item BASE @var{expression}
8878 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8879 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8880
8881 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8882 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8883 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8884 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8885
8886 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8887 @item END
8888 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8889
8890 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8891 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8892 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8893 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8894
8895 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8896 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8897 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8898 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8899
8900 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8901 same line, with no change in its effect.
8902
8903 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8904 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8905 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8906 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8907 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8908 command line.
8909
8910 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8911 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8912 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8913 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8914 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8915
8916 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8917 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8918 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8919 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8920 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8921 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8922 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8923 file, in the order specified.
8924
8925 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8926 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8927 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8928 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8929 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8930 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8931
8932 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8933 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8934 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8935 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8936 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8937 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8938 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8939 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8940 @end table
8941
8942 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8943 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8944 @include fdl.texi
8945
8946 @node LD Index
8947 @unnumbered LD Index
8948
8949 @printindex cp
8950
8951 @tex
8952 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8953 % meantime:
8954 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8955 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8956 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8957 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8958 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8959 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8960 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8961 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8962 \page\colophon
8963 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8964 @end tex
8965
8966 @bye
This page took 0.255135 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.